Psion WLPC24H User Manual 7035 Book

Psion Inc 7035 Book

7035 8255 8260 User Manual

 7035, 8255 & 8260Terminals User Manual March 9, 2000 Part No. 80439.C
 © Copyright 2000 by Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Teklogix Inc., isissued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part,except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goodsand services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design,manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests ofTeklogix Inc. All trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
 Return-To-Factory Warranty Teklogix warrants a return-to-factory warranty for a period of 90 days from shipmentor 120 days from shipment where Teklogix installs the equipment. The warranty onTeklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has beentampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of anauthorized Teklogix service organization. See Teklogix terms and conditions of salefor full details. Service When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of thefailure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred.Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning anyproducts to the factory, call the Service Centre in your region for a ReturnAuthorization number. This will help us to service your product more efficiently. Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate and up-to-date.Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not beheld responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presentedin this manual.
 Declaration Of Conformity Product: 7035 Hand-Held TerminalApplication of Council EMC Directive: 89/336/EECDirective(s):Conformity Declared  EN 55022: 1994; Class B; ETS 300 328: 1996to Standards: EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997, ETS 300 826: 1997EN 61000-4-2; ±4 kV CD; ±8 kV ADEN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHzManufacturer: Teklogix Incorporated2100 Meadowvale BoulevardMississauga, OntarioCanada L5N 7J9Year of Manufacture: 1999Manufacturer’s Address Teklogix S.A.in the European Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1.Community: 13856 Aix-En-ProvenceCedex 3; FranceType of Equipment: Information Technology EquipmentEquipment Class: Commercial and Light Industrial
 Declaration Of Conformity Product: 8255 Vehicle-Mount TerminalApplication of Council EMC Directive: 89/336/EECDirective(s): Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EECConformity Declared  EN 55022: 1998; Class B; ETS 300 826: 1997to Standards: EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997EN 61000-4-2; ±4 kV CD; ±8 kV ADEN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHzISO 7637-1: 1990ISO 7637-2: 1990EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11Manufacturer: Teklogix Incorporated2100 Meadowvale Blvd.Mississauga, OntarioCanada L5N 7J9Year of Manufacture:  1999Manufacturer’s Address Teklogix S.A.in European Community: Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1.13856 Aix-En-ProvenceCedex 3; FranceType of Equipment: Information TechnologyEquipment Class: Commercial and Light Industrial
 Declaration Of Conformity Product: 8255 LCD Vehicle-Mount TerminalApplication of Council EMC Directive: 89/336/EECDirective(s): Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EECConformity Declared  EN 55022: 1998; Class B; ETS 300 826: 1997to Standards: EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997EN 61000-4-2; ±4 kV CD; ±8 kV ADEN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHzISO 7637-1: 1990ISO 7637-2: 1990EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11Manufacturer: Teklogix Incorporated2100 Meadowvale Blvd.Mississauga, OntarioCanada L5N 7J9Year of Manufacture:  1999Manufacturer’s Address Teklogix S.A.in European Community: Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1.13856 Aix-En-ProvenceCedex 3; FranceType of Equipment: Information TechnologyEquipment Class: Commercial and Light Industrial
 Declaration Of Conformity Product: 8260  Vehicle-Mount TerminalApplication of Council EMC Directive: 89/336/EECDirective(s): Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EECConformity Declared  EN 55022: 1998; Class B; ETS 300 826: 1997to Standards: EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997EN 61000-4-2; ±4 kV CD; ±8 kV ADEN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHzISO 7637-1: 1990ISO 7637-2: 1990EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11Manufacturer: Teklogix Incorporated2100 Meadowvale Blvd.Mississauga, OntarioCanada L5N 7J9Year of Manufacture:  1999Manufacturer’s Address Teklogix S.A.in European Community: Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1.13856 Aix-En-ProvenceCedex 3; FranceType of Equipment: Information TechnologyEquipment Class: Commercial and Light Industrial
 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual i T ABLE   OF  C ONTENTS Program License Agreement .............................ix Safety Summary .....................................xi Chapter 1:  Introduction 1.1 About This Manual ............................31.2 Text Conventions .............................41.3 About The Terminals ...........................51.3.1 Features ............................51.3.2 The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal ................71.3.3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers ...........111.3.4 The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal – LCD or VFD .....111.3.5 The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only .......12 Chapter 2:  Basic Assembly And Operation 2.1 Preparing The 7035 For Operation ....................172.1.1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna .............172.1.2 The Battery Pack – Removing And Installing.........172.1.3 Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip .....192.2 Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals..............202.2.1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal ........202.2.2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate ........212.2.3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal .................232.2.4 Connecting The 8255/8260 Antenna .............242.2.5 Installing The Cables .....................242.2.6 Installing The Extension Power Cable ............252.3 Basic Operation Of The Terminals ....................262.3.1 Turning The Terminals On And Off .............262.3.2 Resetting Terminals ......................27
 Contentsii Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 2.3.3 The Display Menu ......................282.3.4 The Keyboard ........................302.4 The Indicators ..............................392.4.1 LEDs .............................392.4.2 Onscreen Indicators – 7035 Only ..............402.4.3 Softkeys ...........................422.4.4 The Battery Gauge (7035 Only) ...............422.4.5 The Beeper ..........................422.5 The Display ...............................442.5.1 Adjusting The Display Contrast ...............442.5.2 Panning ............................452.6 The Integrated Scanner Option – 7035 Only ..............462.6.1 Warnings ...........................462.6.2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner ............462.6.3 Scanning Techniques.....................482.7 Infrared (IrDA) Port – 7035 Only ....................482.8 Maintenance ...............................482.8.1 Cleaning All Terminals ...................482.8.2 7035 – Special Instructions..................492.8.3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery ................49 Chapter 3:  Tekterm 3.1 Introduction ...............................533.2 Launching Tekterm ...........................533.3 Working With Application Session Windows ..............543.4 Radio Statistics Screens .........................543.4.1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen..............543.4.2 802.11 Radio Statistics Screen ................553.4.3 TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen.....563.4.4 TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen......573.5 Resetting Radio Statistics ........................603.6 Exiting Tekterm .............................60 Chapter 4:  TESS Operations 4.1 Configuration ..............................634.2 Working With Multiple Sessions ....................63
 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual iiiContents 4.3 The Field Types ..............................644.4 Data Entry .................................644.4.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement ..........654.4.2 <CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS ...............664.4.3 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS ...............674.5 Lock Messages ..............................694.6 Control Commands ............................69 Chapter 5:  ANSI Operations 5.1 Configuration ...............................735.2 Sending Data To The Host ........................735.3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys.............745.4 Working With Sessions ..........................755.4.1 Establishing A New Session..................755.4.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions.......755.4.3 Closing A Session .......................765.4.4 Printing A Screen .......................765.4.5 Smart Echo – Disabling ....................76 Chapter 6:  Setting Parameters 6.1 Using The Parameter Manager ......................816.2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu ...........816.3 Working With Menus ...........................836.3.1 Softkey Function Keys ....................836.3.2 Displaying Sub-Menus ....................846.3.3 Numeric Parameters ......................846.3.4 Y/N Parameters ........................856.3.5 Alpha Parameters .......................856.3.6 String Entry Parameters ....................856.3.7 Saving Changes To Parameters ................876.3.8 Resetting The Terminal ....................876.3.9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values ...........876.4 Terminal Parameters............................886.4.1 Displaying The Parameters Menu ...............886.5 System...................................906.5.1 Volume And Contrast .....................90
 Contentsiv Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 6.5.2 Key Click...........................916.5.3 Typematic Rpt ........................916.5.4 Panning ............................926.5.5 Backlight ...........................946.5.6 Code Page ..........................956.5.7 Font Size – North American And European .........966.5.8 Font Size – Chinese And Korean ..............976.5.9 Palette Remap ........................986.5.10 Watchdog Timer .......................996.5.11 Power – 7035 Only......................996.5.12 One-Shot Mode .......................1006.6 Scanner..................................1016.6.1 Type .............................1016.6.2 Options ............................1026.6.3 Barcode............................1056.7 Applications ...............................1156.7.1 ANSI Settings ........................1166.7.2 Serial .............................1266.7.3 TESS Settings ........................1266.7.4 Features............................1386.8 View Manager ..............................1396.9 Ports– Serial 1 And Console 2 ......................1416.9.1 Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options .........1416.9.2 Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings .........1426.9.3 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad .......1446.9.4 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Scan-See ......1446.10 Global Macros ..............................1506.10.1 Displaying The Global Macros Menu ............1506.10.2 Displaying The Global Macros Table ............1516.10.3 Choosing An ASCII Character................1526.10.4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters ............1526.10.5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros...........1536.11 Network .................................1536.12 Radio ...................................1546.13 Sound ..................................154
 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual vContents Chapter 7:  Terminal Accessories 7.1 External Bar Code Readers .......................1597.1.1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader ..........1597.2 The 7035 Battery ............................1607.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions...........1617.2.2 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Specifications ..........1627.3 The 7942 In-Unit Charger........................1637.3.1 Mounting Bracket ......................1647.3.2 Connecting The Power Source ...............1647.3.3 In-Unit Charger LED Indicators...............1647.3.4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger ......1657.3.5 Charging The Battery ....................1657.3.6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions ..............1657.3.7 Charger Fault Conditions ..................1667.3.8 Removing The Terminal From The In-Unit Charger ....1667.3.9 7942 Charger Specifications.................1667.4 The 7967 Gang Charger.........................1677.4.1 Connecting The Power Source ...............1677.4.2 Inserting And Charging The Battery ............1677.4.3 Fault Conditions .......................1687.4.4 7967 Charger Specifications.................1697.5 Important Charger Safety Instructions .................1697.6 Antenna Types..............................1707.7 The 7035 Picker Cradle .........................1717.7.1 Mounting Hardware .....................1717.7.2 Installation ..........................1717.7.3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting ........1727.7.4 Mounting The Cradle ....................1737.7.5 Installing The Cables ....................1737.7.6 Connecting A Cable .....................1737.7.7 Connecting The Power Source ...............1747.7.8 Attaching A Port Replicator .................1747.7.9 Picker Cradle Maintenance .................1747.7.10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal ........1757.7.11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator ................176
 Contentsvi Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 7.7.12 Specifications.........................1777.8 Accessories Part Number List ......................179 Chapter 8:  Specifications 8.1 Radio Specifications ...........................1838.2 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specifications ................1868.3 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specifications ...........1888.4 Peripheral Ports .............................1918.4.1 Serial Port 1 (COM 1) ....................1918.4.2 Serial Port 2 (COM 2) ....................1918.5 Memory Expansion Board........................1928.6 IrDA Port (7035 Only)..........................1928.7 Wireless Communication Options ....................1928.8 Bar Code Scanning............................1938.8.1 Internal Scanners (7035 Only) ................1938.8.2 External Scanners ......................1938.8.3 Internal Scanner Port (7035 Only) ..............1938.9 Internal Scanner Specifications (7035 Only) ..............1948.10 Power Management (7035 Only) ....................1978.10.1 Power Save States ......................1978.11 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) .................199 Appendices Appendix A:  Support Services And Worldwide Offices A.1 Support Services .............................A-1A.1.1 North American Helpdesk ..................A-1A.1.2 International Support .....................A-1 Appendices Appendix B:  Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams B.1 7035 Peripheral Port I/O Connector  (28-Pin PCR) ...........B-1B.2 8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector  (28-Pin PCR) ..........B-2B.3 8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR).........B-4
 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual viiContents B.4 Internal Scanner Connector .......................B-6B.5 Flash Serial Download Cable ......................B-6B.6 28-Pin PCR To 8-Pin DIN Connector – P.N. 19726 ..........B-7B.7 28-Pin PCR To 7-Pin DIN Connector – P.N. 19727 ..........B-7B.8 Flash Serial Download Cable – P.N. 20075...............B-8B.9 Scanner Wand Adaptor Cable – P.N. 30092...............B-8 Appendix C:  ASCII Character TableAppendix D:  Radio Parameters D.1 TRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio Parameters .....D-1D.2 TRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio Parameters ........D-4D.3 TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters ...............D-6D.3.1 Cellular ...........................D-6D.3.2 Channel ...........................D-7D.3.3 Poll Timing .........................D-9D.3.4 Power Saving .......................D-11D.3.5 CIS Data ..........................D-11D.4 TRX7410/10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters .....D-12D.4.1 Channel ..........................D-12D.4.2 WLAN Timing.......................D-14D.4.3 Power Saving .......................D-14D.4.4 CIS Data ..........................D-15D.5 TRX7460 Mobitex Radio .......................D-15
 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual ix P ROGRAM  L ICENSE  A GREEMENT These products contains proprietary information of Teklogix Inc. as well as the following companies: International Business Machines Corporation, Phoenix Technologies Limited, Datalight, Inc. 1  and Pacific Softworks Incorporated.Software restrictions are as follows and shall be enforced to the fullest extent possi-ble by applicable law:i. copying and/or transfer of the software is prohibited; andii. reverse assembly, reverse compilation, or other translation of the software is prohibited; andiii. software is copyrighted and licensed (not sold) and that title to the software is not transferred; andiv. the owner of the software “DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION) ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE; andv. liability is limited to the amount paid by the end user for the software; andvi. the use of the software is allowed only in conjunction with products described herein. 1 Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc. FlashFX™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc. Copyright 1993-1999 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual xi S AFETY  S UMMARY This safety information is for the protection of both operating and service personnel.This equipment complies with Class B, Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.For sites in Canada, Teklogix TRX7430 and TRX7440 802.11 radios require a radiolicence unless they are installed totally within a building (user shall obtain licencefrom Industry Canada).Use only Teklogix approved peripheral devices and cables. RF E XPOSURE  R EQUIREMENTS To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for mobile transmitting devices,a separation distance of 20 cm or more should be maintained between theantenna of this device and persons during device operation. To ensure com-pliance, operation at closer than this distance is not recommended. D O  N OT  O PERATE  I N  A N  E XPLOSIVE  A TMOSPHERE Operating Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result inan explosion. D O NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURESTo avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only beremoved by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipmentwithout the covers and enclosures properly installed.
Safety Summaryxii Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualDO NOT HOLD ANTENNATo avoid discomfort due to the local heating effect of Radio Frequencyenergy, do not touch the antenna when a terminal is transmitting.USE PROPER FUSEFor vehicle-mount terminals, use only the fuses specified. A replacementfuse must meet the type, voltage rating and current rating for the fuse itreplaces or a fire may result.CAUTION!Danger of explosion if a 7035 battery is incorrectly handled, charged,disposed of or replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according tothe instructions described in “Maintaining The 7035 Battery” on page 49.Carefully review all battery safety issues listed in the section titled “Lith-ium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions” on page 161 and page 162.VORSICHT!Explosiongefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nurdurch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigenTyp. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 1INTRODUCTION 111.1  About This Manual ...............................31.2  Text Conventions ................................41.3  About The Terminals ..............................51.3.1  Features .................................51.3.2  The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal .....................71.3.3  7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers ................111.3.4  The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal – LCD or VFD ...........111.3.5  The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only.............12
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 3Chapter 1: IntroductionAbout This Manual1.1  About This ManualThis manual describes how to operate the Teklogix 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals.Chapter 1: Introductionprovides a basic overview of the 7035 hand-held terminal and the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals.Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operationexplains how to attach an antenna, how to work with internal and external power supplies and how to mount vehicle-mount terminals. It also describes the LEDs, beeper and display.Chapter 3: Tektermdescribes how to work with application sessions within the Tekterm program.Chapter 4: TESS Operationsdescribes editing modes, status messages and control commands for TESS operations.Chapter 5: ANSI Operationsprovides information about function key equivalents and data entry for ANSI operations.Chapter 6: Setting Parameterslists and defines the terminal parameters.Chapter 7: Terminal Accessoriesprovides information about using barcode readers and other accessories such as the AC power adaptor, battery chargers, and so on.Chapter 8: Specificationscontains the technical specifications for the terminal, the battery charger and the COM ports.Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagramsincludes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables.Appendix C: ASCII Character Tableprovides a table of ASCII characters.Appendix D: Radio Parametersdescribes the parameters for the TRX7370 Narrowband radio, the TRX7430 Lucent WaveLAN II IEEE 802.11 PC Card and the TRX7440 Proxim RangeLAN 802 8400 PC Card and the TRX7410/TRX7410A 902 SS PC card.
Chapter 1: IntroductionText Conventions4Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual1.2  Text ConventionsNote: Notes highlight additional helpful information.Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 5Chapter 1: IntroductionAbout The Terminals1.3  About The TerminalsThe 7035 hand-held terminal and the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount RF terminals all run DOS and  can operate in a Teklogix narrowband or 902 spread spectrum RF system using the “cellular” or “new” protocol. They can also operated in a 2.4 GHz 802.11 system.1.3.1  FeaturesSome features of these terminals include:• 7035s are equipped with 33 MHz 486DX CPU with internal cache.• 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals are equipped with 66 MHz 486DX CPU with internal cache.• 8 MB RAM – can be expanded to 16 MB.• 4 MB of Flash ROM – can be expanded to 8 MB.• RF connectivity options include:- IEEE 802.11 2.4 GHz frequency hopping and direct sequence PC card radios (1-2 Mbps) (TRX7430), (TRX7440).- TRX7370 Narrowband PC card-based radios (403-512 MHz, 4800-19200 bps).- TRX7410 TekLan 902 MHz direct sequence spread spectrum radios.• 7035 terminal can support a standard external or optional internal antenna. (Note that the internal antenna is only available with certain 802.11 radios.)• 8255  and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals are shipped with external antennas that are compatible with the operating RF system.• Rugged, sealed enclosure, suitable for industrial environments.• Seamless operation on all Teklogix 32-bit narrowband RF backbones:- ANSI, TESS (IBM 3270, IBM5250 and HP2392) emulation application built in.- uses high performance TRX7370 narrowband radio.• Embedded DOS.• Ergonomic design:- 7035 offers one-handed “scan & confirm” design- all terminals provide high visibility display fonts and low impact keys.
Chapter 1: IntroductionFeatures6Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual- full alphanumeric keyboard.- keyboard can be customized using overlays, soft-label function keys and macro keys.- vehicle-mount terminals can be ordered with a QWERTY, an ABC or an AZERTY keyboard.- autopanning in text mode.- 7035 status screen area displays system information – battery gauge, RF link status and shift indicators – as the application is running.- vehicle-mounts are equipped with a special set of LEDs that act as shift indicators, blinking when a key is active and staying on when a key is locked “on”.- softkey labels are displayed at the bottom of all terminal screens, indicating the function of function keys <F1> to <F4> on the 7035 – <F1> to <F6> on vehicle-mounts.• Two internal PC Card Type II slots:- one slot is reserved for the terminal radio.- the extra slot can be used for any PC Card Type II Flash disk, adding from 16 to 128 MB of additional mass storage that appears as an additional drive. (Note that this slot is not available if the terminal is operating with a TRX7370 narrowband or a TRX7410 TekLan 902 spread spectrum radio.)• RS-232 peripheral port supports decoded and non-decoded scanners, serial printers and COM devices.• Macro keys to program special characters, keys and/or frequently-used key strokes.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 7Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 7035 Hand-Held Terminal1.3.2  The 7035 Hand-Held TerminalFigure 1.1 The 7035 Hand-Held
Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 7035 Hand-Held Terminal8Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualFigure 1.2 7035-I With Optional Pistol Grip Handle
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 9Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 7035 Hand-Held TerminalFigure 1.3 7035 Peripheral PortFigure 1.4 Infrared (IrDA) PortWarning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.IrDA PortIntegrated Scanner
Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 7035 Hand-Held Terminal10 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualFigure 1.5 Safety LabelsLITHIUM-ION RECHARGEABLEBATTERY 7.2 V, 1350mAhASSEMBLED IN JAPANBURN HAZARD, DO NOT INCINERATEOR HEAT ABOVE 100˚C (212F)DO NOT DISASSEMBLENOT FOR USE BELOW -20˚C (-4F)RECYCLE OR DISPOSE OF PROPERLYWARNING!2060520597AMississauga, Ont.Canada, L5N 7J9U.S. PAT. 4,758,717Model 7035 HandheldSerial No.:Manufactured:Ref No.:Made inCanadaThis device complies with 21 CFR 1040.10This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,in-cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.CANADA: XXX XXX XXX FCC ID: XXXXXX - XXThis product containsXXXXXX 2.4 GHz RadioXXXXX XXX - XXPN: XXX-XXXXXX-XXCAUTION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM630-680nm  LASER DIODE1.0 MILLIWATT MAX.OUTPUTCLASS II LASER PRODUCTLASER RADIATIONSEE BATTERY COMPARTMENT FOR MANUFACTURING DATA.20599-001ACBof the battery.This label is affixed to the underside• Serial Number• Reference Number. This field contains• Manufactured. This field contains the terminal'sa numeric code used to identify thedate of manufacture.country code, the temperature rangeof the terminal, and so on.This label lists the following:B. Lithium-Ion Battery Warning LabelA. Laser Radiation Warning LabelC. Model/Serial Number Label
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 11Chapter 1: Introduction7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers1.3.3  7035 Integrated Scanner Patent NumbersThe integrated scanner used in the 7035 may be covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 4,360,798; 4,369,361; 4,387,297; 4,460,120; 4,496,831; 4,593,186; 4,603.262; 4,607,156; 4,652,750; 4,673,805; 4,736,095; 4,758,717; 4,816,660; 4,845,350; 4,896,026; 4,897,532; 4,923,281; 4,933,538; 4,992,717; 5,015,833; 5,017,765; 5,021,641; 5,029,183; 5,047, 617; 5,103,461; 5,113,445; 5,130,520; 5,140,144; 5,142,550; 5,149,950; 5,157,687; 5,168,148; 5,168,149; 5,180,904; 5,229,591; 5,230,088; 5,235,167; 5,243,655; 5,247,162; 5,250,791; 5,250,792; 5,262,627; 5,280,163; 5,280,164; 5,280,498; 5,304,786; 5,304,788; 5,321,246; 5,367,151; 5,373,148; 5,378.882; 5,377,361; 5,396,053; 5,396,055; 5,399,846; 5,408,081; 5,410,139; 5,410,140; 5,412,198; 5,418,812; 5,420,411; 5,436,440; 5,444,231; 5,449,891; 5,449,893; 5,468,949; 5,479,000; 5,479,002; 5,479,441; 5,504,322; 5,528,621; 5,532,469; 5,543,610; 5,545,889; 5,552,592; 5,578,810; 5,589,680;D305,885; D341,584; D344,501; D359,483; D362,435; D363,700; D363,918; D370,478.Invention No. 55,358; 62,539; 69,060; 69,187 (Taiwan); No: 1,601,796; 1,907,875; 1,955,269 (Japan).European Patent 367,299; 414,281; 367,300; 367,298; UK 2,072,832; France 81/03938; Italy 1,138,713.1.3.4  The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal – LCD or VFDNote: The 8255 terminal is available with a liquid crystal display (LCD) or a vacuum fluorescent display (VFD).Figure 1.6 The 8255 Vehicle-Mount
Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only12 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualFigure 1.7 8255 Ports1.3.5  The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD OnlyFigure 1.8 The 8260 Vehicle-MountScanner PortExpansion Port
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 13Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD OnlyFigure 1.9 8260 PortsExpansion PortKeyboardConnectorScannerPort
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 15BASIC ASSEMBLY AND OPERATION 222.1  Preparing The 7035 For Operation .......................172.1.1  Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna ..................172.1.2  The Battery Pack – Removing And Installing ..............172.1.3  Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip...........192.1.3.1  Attaching The Hand Strap ...................192.1.3.2  Attaching The Pistol Grip....................192.2  Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals ................202.2.1  Mounting The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal ..............202.2.2  Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate .............212.2.3  Mounting The 8260 Terminal ......................232.2.4  Connecting The 8255/8260 Antenna...................242.2.5  Installing The Cables...........................242.2.6  Installing The Extension Power Cable..................252.3  Basic Operation Of The Terminals .......................262.3.1  Turning The Terminals On And Off ...................262.3.1.1  7035 Hand-Held ........................262.3.1.2  8255 And 8260 Vehicle-Mounts ................272.3.2  Resetting Terminals ...........................272.3.2.1  Resetting The 7035 .......................272.3.2.2  Resetting The 8255 And 8260 .................272.3.3  The Display Menu ............................282.3.3.1  Bypassing Tekterm At Terminal Bootup ............282.3.3.2  Launching And Exiting The Parameters Menu.........282.3.3.3  Launching And Exiting Tekterm ................292.3.3.4  Launching And Exiting DOS ..................292.3.4  The Keyboard ..............................302.3.4.1  The Status Area – 7035 Only ..................302.3.4.2  <ORANGE> And <BLUE> Keys ...............30
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation16 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.3.4.3  The Standard Keys.......................312.3.4.4  Key Lock Function ......................342.3.4.5  The Function Keys – Softkeys.................362.3.4.6  The 7035 Hand-Held – Accessing Function Keys ......362.3.4.7  The 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts – Accessing Function Keys . 372.3.4.8  The Macro Keys – Creating Macros .............392.4  The Indicators .................................392.4.1  LEDs ..................................392.4.2  Onscreen Indicators – 7035 Only....................402.4.3  Softkeys.................................422.4.5  The Beeper ...............................422.4.5.1  Beeper Volume – <BLUE> <F3> And <F4> .........432.4.5.2  Beeper Volume – The “Volume” Parameter..........432.5  The Display ..................................442.5.1  Adjusting The Display Contrast ....................442.5.1.1  Contrast Adjustment – <BLUE> <F1> And <F2> ......442.5.1.2  Contrast Adjustment Using The “Contrast” Parameter ....452.5.2  Panning .................................452.6  The Integrated Scanner Option – 7035 Only .................462.6.1  Warnings ................................462.6.2  Operation Of The Integrated Scanner .................462.6.3  Scanning Techniques ..........................482.7  Infrared (IrDA) Port – 7035 Only.......................482.8  Maintenance..................................482.8.1  Cleaning All Terminals .........................482.8.2  7035 – Special Instructions.......................492.8.3  Maintaining The 7035 Battery .....................49
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 17Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationPreparing The 7035 For Operation2.1  Preparing The 7035 For OperationNote: For vehicle-mount installation instructions, refer to “Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals” beginning on page 20.Preparing the 7035 terminal for operation includes installing the battery pack, and if an external antenna is required, connecting the antenna to the 7035.Important: All battery packs must be charged before use. Refer to “The 7967 Gang Charger” on page 167 for battery charging details.2.1.1  Connecting The 7035 Whip AntennaTo begin, if your 7035 has a plastic cap at the top of the unit, it uses an internal antenna – a whip antenna is not required.If a whip antenna was supplied with the 7035, it should be attached to the top of the unit. Make certain that the antenna is securely attached to the terminal.Important: If you are unsure if the antenna supplied is intended for your terminal, refer to “Antenna Types” on page 170. In addition, failure to securely attach the antenna to the terminal can result in poor communication quality.2.1.2  The Battery Pack – Removing And InstallingThe 7035 hand-held terminal operates with a Lithium-Ion battery pack.Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines listed on page 50 and also in the section titled “Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions” on page 161.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Battery Pack – Removing And Installing18 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualWarning: When a battery is removed from the terminal, a backup of the system, application and any work in progress is maintained for up to 10 minutes. A fresh battery must be installed within this 10 minute timeframe. THIS BACKUP WILL NOT FUNCTION UNLESS THE TERMINAL IS TURNED OFF BEFORE THE BATTERY IS REMOVED. Removing the battery while the unit is operating will result in a full reboot.Even after the system backup has expired, the date and time are maintained for 100 hours without a battery.To remove the battery pack:•Turn the terminal upside down (antenna pointing down).•Grasp the unit around the keypad area with your forefinger resting on the battery release button.The battery release button is located at the base of the terminal, just above the 28-pin port. •Press the button until the battery unlatches.Figure 2.1 Battery Compartment Of The 7035 TerminalTo install the battery pack:•Insert the battery pack with the textured plastic facing you. Click the battery into place.Battery ReleaseButton
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 19Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationAttaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip2.1.3  Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol GripNote: For a list of additional accessories, refer to “Accessories Part Number List” on page 179.2.1.3.1 Attaching The Hand StrapNote: A Phillips head screwdriver is required.Teklogix recommends that the hand strap provided with your terminal always be used. However, if your terminal has an internal scanner and you plan to use the pistol grip accessory, a hand strap is not required. Each end of the hand strap has two holes drilled in it. The holes nearest the outer edges of the hand strap allow the hand strap to be installed more loosely while the holes closer to the centre of the strap provide a tighter fit. The hand strap can be secured either on the left or the right side of the terminal, depending on operator preference. Two black #4-40 Phillips head screws are provided with the hand strap for attachment. Four threaded inserts are available on the back of the terminal. The hand strap can be attached either to the upper- and lower-most inserts on the left side of the terminal or to the upper- and lower-most inserts on the right side of the terminal. To attach the hand strap, choose on which side of the terminal the hand strap is to be attached and securely fasten the screws into the back of the terminal.2.1.3.2 Attaching The Pistol GripNote: A Phillips head screwdriver is required.The four threaded inserts in the upper part of the terminal casing are used to attach the pistol grip. Four black #4-40 Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory. Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism has been securely snapped into the pistol grip body and the trigger operates properly. Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the terminal and the holes on the terminal and pistol grip are aligned. Using a Phillips screw driver, securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of the terminal.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationInstalling 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals20 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.2  Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount TerminalsThe installation of the vehicle-mount terminal depends on the type of vehicle and the application environment. A typical installation includes:1. Mounting the terminal.2. Connecting the antenna.3. Installing the power extensionNote: Make certain that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage.2.2.1  Mounting The 8255 Vehicle-Mount TerminalThere are two mounting options available:1. Using the horizontal/vertical mounting cradle. (Refer to Figure 2.2.)2. Using the cradle (P.N. 18457) and cradle mounting plate (P.N. 18197).Note: The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1/4-20.Figure 2.2 The Horizontal/Vertical Mounting Cradle18452Horizontal/vertical cradle30º30º15º
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 21Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationUsing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate2.2.2  Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting PlateAttaching The Terminal And CradleFirst, the terminal must be attached to the cradle (Figure 2.3). To do this:•Place the terminal in the cradle so that the display side of the terminal is on the same side as the quick release fasteners. The keyboard side of the termi-nal should be on the same side as the tabs.•Match the side screw holes on the terminal with the appropriate pairs of holes on the cradle and screw them together. The choice of holes determines the angle at which the terminal tilts.Figure 2.3 The Terminal Cradle (P.N. 18457)Screw HolesTabs10.75 cm4.25 in.5.25 cm2 in.29.8 cm11.45 in.FrontBackQuick ReleaseFasteners
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationUsing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate22 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualInstalling The Cradle Mounting PlateNext, the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle. The cradle mounting plate shown in Figure 2.4 holds the terminal and cradle in place.•Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1/4" holes.Note: The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1/4-20.Figure 2.4 The Cradle Mounting Plate (P.N. 18197)Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting PlateNext, the terminal and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate.•Align the tabs on the rear of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting plate and push the cradle back and down.•Slide the fasteners on the front of the cradle until they snap to the posts on the mounting plate.Warning: Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are not locked.PostTabGuides25.4 cm10.0 in.FrontBack13 cm5 in.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 23Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationMounting The 8260 Terminal2.2.3  Mounting The 8260 TerminalFigure 2.5 8260 Mounting Options18452-001Horizontal/vertical cradle18451Cradle support plate18239Keyboard cradle19448(6 foot cable)19449(10 inch cable)15º15º15º15º20164(15 foot cable)
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationConnecting The 8255/8260 Antenna24 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualThere are three mounting options available. Each possible option is listed below. Figure 2.5 on page 23 provides a visual illustration of the mounting options.1. The horizontal/vertical mounting cradle (P.N. 18452) and the keyboard cradle (P.N. 18239).2. The combined mounting option using the horizontal/vertical mounting cradle (P.N. 18452-001), the keyboard cradle (P.N. 18239), and the cradle support plate (P.N. 18451).3. Using the terminal cradle (P.N. 18198) for the display, the cradle mounting plate (P.N. 18197) and the keyboard cradle (P.N. 18239).2.2.4  Connecting The 8255/8260 AntennaWarning: Operating the terminal without an antenna may damage the radio.The antenna consists of the antenna whip and a magnetic mount with cable. •For narrow band radios, screw the antenna on in a clockwise direction.•For spread spectrum radios, screw the antenna on in a counter-clockwise direction.The antenna works best when placed vertically and away from metal objects that may interfere with the radio signal. The best location for the magnetic mount on a fork lift truck is on the middle of the roof or cab cover, at least 20 centimeters away from the operator.Warning: As a safety precaution, USERS ARE NOT PERMITTED TO CHANGE THE ANTENNA.2.2.5  Installing The CablesNote: Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage.When installing the cables between the terminal and other devices, consider the following:•Ensure the drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.•Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.•Protect cables by using grommets when cables pass through metal.•Prevent cables and connectors from moving and loosening by using plastic straps.•Keep the cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid, and other potential hazards.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 25Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationInstalling The Extension Power Cable•Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.•Leave enough slack on the cables so that the terminal can be removed easily for maintenance.2.2.6  Installing The Extension Power CableThe terminal has a short power cord and connector. The extension power cable (P.N. 13985) should be connected from the terminal’s power cord to a fused power source capable of carrying the additional 3 Amps required by standard terminals or 5 Amps for freezer terminals.Note: For vehicles operating on 24 Volts or above, connections must be made as close to the vehicle battery as possible.If an unfused power source must be used, install the fuse assembly (P.N. 19440) provided with P.N. 13985. To connect the fuse assembly, push the male connector of the fuse assembly into the female connector at the positive (red) lead of the power cable. Connect the red lead to the positive side of the battery. Connect the black lead to the negative side of the battery.Warning: Do not reverse the polarity or connect to a voltage outside the 10-55 volt range.Note: When installing terminals on vehicles operating on 24 Volts and above, the diode assembly (supplied with the extension power cable 13985) must be used to reduce the AC ripple produced by the SCR traction motor controller on the vehicle. To connect the diode, push the male connector on the diode assembly into the female connector on the positive (red) lead of the power cable. If the fuse assembly is already installed, connect the diode assembly to the fuse assembly as described in the previous sentence. Connect the red wire from the diode assembly to a fused power source on the vehicle.It is recommended that all connections be secured with electrical tape or heat shrink to prevent contaminants from degrading the connection.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationBasic Operation Of The Terminals26 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.3  Basic Operation Of The TerminalsImportant: Any differences in operation between the 7035 hand-held and the 8255/8260 vehicle-mount terminals are explicitly indicated.The Teklogix 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals are fully functional personal computers (PCs), compatible with the IBM AT (486) architecture. They normally come pre-loaded with DOS. These terminals are intended to be used in terminal emulation mode for real-time wireless data transaction processing. However, they can also be used stand-alone in batch mode.The remainder of this manual describes terminal operation as it applies to normal terminal emulation mode, utilizing wireless communication to a host computer.The operation of these terminals depends on the application software running on the host computer. The terminals’ interaction with the application depends on both the terminal operating system and the terminal hardware. This chapter outlines the unique features of the hardware. For more information on the terminal operating system, see Chapter 6: Setting Parameters.2.3.1  Turning The Terminals On And Off2.3.1.1 7035 Hand-HeldTurning On The 7035The 7035 does not have a dedicated On/Off button. To turn the 7035 on:•Press and hold down the <ENTER/ON> key for at least one second.Turning Off The 7035Important: Turning the 7035 off does not result in a complete reboot; rather, the terminal enters a power-saving, “suspend” mode (assuming that a value other than ‘Disabled’ has been assigned to the power-saving parameter, “Power Down” - see page 99). When the terminal is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds. The terminal will emit a few beep sequences while it wakes from suspend state.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 27Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation8255 And 8260 Vehicle-MountsTo turn the 7035 off:•Press the <BLUE> key, and then press the <ENTER/ON> key.Important: If the <BLUE> key is locked “on”, the terminal will not turn off. (Look for the word BLUE, displayed in uppercase characters in the status area at the bottom of the screen.) If this key is locked “on”, press it again to unlock it, and then press <BLUE> <ENTER/ON> to turn the terminal off.2.3.1.2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle-MountsBoth types of vehicle-mount terminals have on/off switches at the back of the unit.•Reach around to the back of the terminal toward your right, and press the On/Off switch – I represents “on” and “O” represents off.2.3.2  Resetting TerminalsNote: Regardless of which type of terminal you are using, a reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit. When the terminal is reset, it reboots to the Tekterm application.2.3.2.1 Resetting The 7035To reset the 7035:•Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds.A reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit. When the terminal is reset, it reboots to the Tekterm application.2.3.2.2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260To reset the 8255 or 8260:•Using the On/Off switch, turn the terminal off and back on again.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Display Menu28 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.3.3  The Display MenuThe start up, “Display Menu” is used to access the Parameters menu, the Tekterm application and the DOS prompt.2.3.3.1 Bypassing Tekterm At Terminal BootupNormally, the Tekterm application is launched automatically when the terminal is rebooted. To bypass Tekterm and launch the “Display Menu”:•As the terminal is rebooting, press the <ESC> key.If you’re not quick enough with the <ESC> key and Tekterm is launched, press <ALT> and type x to exit Tekterm and return to the “Display Menu”. If you’re using a 7035 hand-held, press the <ORANGE> key, and then press <ALT> and type x.2.3.3.2 Launching And Exiting The Parameters MenuTo launch the “Parameters” menu from the startup “Display” menu:•8255/8260: Type the letter a. •7035: Press <ORANGE>, and then type the letter a.At this point, you’ll be asked to enter a password – either a supervisory or Teklogix level password.Important: If you’re using a 7035 and your password consists of numeric rather than alphabetic characters, remember to press the <ORANGE> key to turn Alpha mode off before typing your password. Check the status area at the bottom of the screen to make sure the onscreen indicator “ORANGE”is no longer displayed.To exit the “Parameters” menu and return to the “Display menu”•Press <F2> – the PREVIOUS key – until the “Display Menu” is visible.A ParametersB EmulationsC DOS Prompt01 Display Menu
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 29Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationLaunching And Exiting Tekterm2.3.3.3 Launching And Exiting TektermNormally, the Tekterm application – an emulation – is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on. If the “Display Menu” is on your screen:•8255/8260: Type the letter b to launch Tekterm. •7035: Press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter b.To exit Tekterm and return to the “Display Menu”:•8255/8260: Press <ALT> and type the letter x. •7035: Press <ORANGE> <ALT>, and type the letter x.2.3.3.4 Launching And Exiting DOSTo launch DOS from the “Display Menu”:•8255/8260: Type the letter c. •7035: Press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter c.At this point, you’ll be asked to enter a password – either a supervisory or Teklogix level password.Important: If you’re using a 7035 and your password consists of numeric rather than alphabetic characters, remember to press the <ORANGE> key to turn Alpha mode off before typing your password. Check the status area at the bottom of the screen to make sure the onscreen indicator “ORANGE”is no longer displayed.To exit DOS and return to the “Display Menu”:•8255/8260: Type start at the DOS prompt, and press <ENTER>, and press <ESC> immediately.•7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing start, and press <ESC> immediately.To exit DOS and return to the “Emu.lations” screen:•8255/8260: Type start at the DOS prompt, and press <ENTER>.•7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing start.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Keyboard30 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.3.4  The KeyboardNote: Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted. Refer to Figure 1.1 on page 7 for key locations.In addition, any differences in keyboard operation between the 7035 hand-held and the 8255/60 vehicle-mounts are explicitly indicated.The 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals are equipped with standard keyboard keys along with two colour keys – an <ORANGE> key and a <BLUE> key – to allow access to additional keys such as the extended function keys and the <CLR> key. Some of the most frequently-used standard keyboard keys along with the keys accessed using the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys are described in this section.2.3.4.1 The Status Area – 7035 OnlyThe 7035 terminal has a status area at the bottom of the terminal screen that indicates which mode keys are currently active. The key or keys pressed are displayed in lowercase letters at the bottom of the screen. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key, it is displayed as ctrl in the status area.The status area also indicates whether or not the function of a mode key has been locked “on”. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in the status area in uppercase letters. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key twice to lock it “on”, it is displayed as CTRL in the status area. Refer to “Onscreen Indicators – 7035 Only” on page 40 and 41 for a description of all possible status area messages.2.3.4.2 <ORANGE> And <BLUE> KeysThe <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys provide a means of accessing additional keyboard options such as the CLR function or the alpha keys. On 7035 hand-held terminals, the <ORANGE> key is used primarily to access alphabetic characters, and on 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mounts, the <ORANGE> key is used to access function and macro keys. The <BLUE> key is used primarily for terminal control keys such as LCD contrast and beeper volume control.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 31Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Standard KeysImportant: When you press the <ORANGE> key only once, it is locked “on” by default. You need to press the <ORANGE> key a second time to unlock or turn it off. Refer to “Key Lock Function” on page 34 for a complete description of this function.KEEP IN MIND that you can change the default key lock function of the <ORANGE> key using the “One-Shot Mode” parameter (see “One-Shot Mode” on page 100).The functions that are accessed using the <ORANGE> or <BLUE> keys are colour coded in orange or blue print above the standard keys, indicating whether you must first press the <ORANGE> or the <BLUE> key before accessing a function.As an example, to access the “CLR” function which is printed in blue characters above the <DEL> key:•Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the <DEL> key.To access the alphabetic characters displayed in orange characters above the standard keys on the 7035:•Press the <ORANGE> key and then, press the appropriate alpha key.2.3.4.3 The Standard KeysThe <SHIFT> KeyThe <SHIFT> key is used to display uppercase letters and to access the punctuation marks displayed on the numeric keys. When this key is pressed, it is only active until the next alphanumeric key is pressed. For example, once you press <SHIFT> and type the letter q, the letter is displayed in uppercase and the “shift” function turns off. Note: On 7035 hand-helds, press the <ORANGE> key to activate Alpha mode, and then press the <SHIFT> key to display uppercase alpha characters. Keep in mind that the <ORANGE> key is locked “on” after being pressed only once.To display all alpha characters in uppercase, lock the <SHIFT> key “on” by pressing it twice. To unlock the <SHIFT> key, press it a third time. For more details about the lock function, refer to “Key Lock Function” on page 34.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Standard Keys32 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualThe Arrow KeysThe Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow – up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear.Manual Panning Keys (Arrow Keys)If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the terminal window, the contents can be “panned” or shifted to display information outside the margins. The 7035 and the 8255 and 8260 terminals allow both manual and automatic panning. The “Panning” parameter specifies when and how the screen contents should be shifted.Note: For details about Auto Panning, refer to “Auto Pan, Left Margin, Right Margin And Bottom Margin” on page 93.Manual panning – shifting the contents of the screen using the <BLUE> key in combination with the <LEFT>, <RIGHT>, <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys – relies on the values set in the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows (lines) to pan or shift.To access the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters:•In the “Parameters” menu, position the cursor on the “System” option and press <F1>.•Move the cursor down to “Panning” and press <F1>.Important: Only the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters are used for manual panning. The remaining parameters in the Panning menu are used to specify auto panning margins.“X Increment” determines the number of spaces the screen pans to the left or right when the <BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key.“Y Increment” determines the number of lines the screen pans up or down when the <BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key.•Type a value in the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 33Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Standard KeysTo pan the screen contents:•Press the <BLUE> key followed by the <RIGHT>, <LEFT>, <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key to pan the entire screen of information. Note that pressing <BLUE> <LEFT> arrow pans the screen to the right, pressing <BLUE> <RIGHT> arrow pans the screen to the left, and so on.Note: To more efficiently pan the content of the screen, you may want to lock the <BLUE> key “on” by pressing it twice. You can then press any arrow key in any direction until the necessary information has been brought into view.When you have finished panning the information, press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off.The <DEL/CLR> KeyThe <DEL> key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke. This key operation is not consistent with the DELETE key on a PC keyboard. It is consistent with the PC BACKSPACE key.The CLR function clears the entire contents of the field in which the cursor resides. To access the CLR function, press the <BLUE> key followed by the <DEL> key. There is no PC keyboard equivalent for this key.The <CTRL> KeyThe <CTRL> key modifies the next key pressed and is application dependent. For example, in a macro field, pressing <CTRL> l followed by the <ENTER> key inserts the function of the <ENTER> key into the macro. In TESS and ANSI applications, defined <CTRL> key combinations perform specific actions. <CTRL> key functions for each application are described in the appropriate chapters of this manual.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationKey Lock Function34 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualThe <ALT> KeyThis key provides access to alternate commands as defined by the application you are using. The <ESC> KeyWhile in the “Parameters” menu, pressing the <ESC> key closes the current menu and displays the previous one. In an ANSI session, pressing this key sends an escape character to the host. In a TESS session, the <ESC> key has no effect.The <TAB> KeyIn a TESS application, pressing the <TAB> key moves the cursor into the next field to the right. In an ANSI application, pressing the <TAB> key transmits a “TAB” character to the host.The <SPACE> KeyPressing this key inserts a blank space between characters.The <SCAN> Key – 7035 OnlyPressing the <SCAN> key – the yellow key with the star-burst scan symbol on it – activates the scanner beam. It is situated in the top-centre of the keyboard for easy right- or left-handed access.2.3.4.4 Key Lock FunctionThe <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL>, <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys have a lock function that allows the function of these keys to be locked “on” until you unlock or turn them off.Locking The <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL> Or <BLUE> KeysTo lock the function of any of these keys “on”:•Press the appropriate key twice.Important: The <ORANGE> key is the only key that locks “on” when pressed only once.KEEP IN MIND however that you can change the default key lock function of the <ORANGE> key using the “One-Shot Mode” parameter (see “One-Shot Mode” on page 100).
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 35Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationKey Lock FunctionOn 7035 hand-held terminals, an onscreen message is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen to indicate that a key is locked “on”. For example, when the <CTRL> key is locked “on”, the onscreen message – CTRL – is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area. For more information about status area indicators, refer to “Onscreen Indicators – 7035 Only” on page 40.On 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals, LEDs are used to indicate the status of a key. When a key is locked “on”, the corresponding LED stays on until the key is unlocked. If you’ve only pressed a key once, the corresponding LED blinks until the key is no longer active.Unlocking The <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL> Or <BLUE> KeysTo unlock or turn off any of these keys:•Press the locked key a third time. On 7035s, the onscreen message indicating the locked key – e.g., SHIFT – is cleared from the status area.On 8255s and 8260s, the corresponding LED turns off.Locking And Unlocking The <ORANGE> KeyTo lock this key “on”:•Press the <ORANGE> key once.To unlock or turn off this key:•Press the locked <ORANGE> key a second time.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Function Keys – Softkeys36 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.3.4.5 The Function Keys – SoftkeysThe 7035, 8255 and 8260 all offer a total of 36 function keys. The function of each of these keys is defined in the application software. The first four function keys – <F1> to <F4> on a 7035 and the first six on a vehicle-mount – <F1> to <F6> – are referred to as softkeys. They are preprogrammed to perform specific actions in the menus.You don’t need to memorize the table below. Softkey labels are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen to identify the function of each key.Table 2.1  Softkeys2.3.4.6 The 7035 Hand-Held – Accessing Function KeysThe 7035 has 36 function keys, the first 12 of which are directly accessible on the keyboard. The remaining 24 require key combinations.Accessing Function Keys <F1> To <F12>Function keys <F1> to <F12> are directly accessible by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard – that is, a key combination is not required to access these function keys.Accessing “Ctrl” Function Keys <F13> To <F24>Accessing <F13> to <F24> requires pressing <CTRL> and one of the function keys, <F1> through <F12>. To access function key <F13>:•Press the <CTRL> key followed by <F1>.To access function key <F14>:•Press the <CTRL> key followed by <F2>, and so on.Function Key Softkey Functions<F1> NEXT – Displays the next sub-menu<F2> PREVIOUS – Displays the previous menu.<F3> DEFAULT – Restores all parameters to the factory settings – even after <F4> has been pressed to save the changes made to parameters.<F4> SAVE – Saves a change to a parameter value.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 37Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts – Accessing Function KeysAccessing “Shift” Function Keys <F25> To <F36>Accessing <F25> to <F36> requires pressing <SHIFT> and one of the function keys, <F1> through <F12>. To access function key <F25>:•Press the <SHIFT> key followed by <F1>.To access function key <F26>:•Press the <SHIFT> key followed by <F2>, and so on.2.3.4.7 The 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts – Accessing Function KeysVehicle-mount terminals have a total of 36 function keys, the first six of which are directly accessible on the keyboard. The remaining 30 require key combinations.Accessing Function Keys <F1> To <F6>The first six function keys on vehicle-mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard. That is, they are dedicated function keys; a key combination is not required. <F1> to <F6> are the bright yellow keys located in the upper-left portion of the keyboard.Accessing Function Keys <F7> To <F12>You’ll find these keys in orange print just above and to the left of the first six alpha keys on the keyboard. The actual alpha key varies depending on the type of keyboard you’re using – QWERTY, ABC or AZERTY. On a QWERTY keyboard, <F7> is accessible from the Q key, <F8> from the W key, and so on. On an ABC keyboard, <F7> is accessible from the A key, <F8> from the B key, and so on. Accessing these function keys requires that you press the <ORANGE> followed by the appropriate alpha key.For example, on a QWERTY keyboard:•To access <F7>, press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter q.•To access <F8>, press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter w, and so on.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts – Accessing Function Keys38 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualAccessing Function Keys <F13> To <F18>To access these function keys, you’ll need to press the <CTRL> key in combination with one of <F1> through <F6>. For example:•To access <F13>, press the <CTRL> key, and then press <F1>.•To access <F14>, press <CTRL> <F2>, and so on.Accessing Function Keys <F19> To <F24>To access <F19> to <F24>, you’ll need to press the <CTRL> key, followed by the <ORANGE> key and then, the appropriate alpha key. For example, on an ABC keyboard:•To access <F19> , press <CTRL> <ORANGE>, and then type the letter a.•To access <F20>, press <CTRL><ORANGE> and type the letter b, and so on.Accessing Function Keys <F25> To <F30>To access these function keys, you’ll need to press the <SHIFT> key in combination with one of <F1> through <F6>.To access <F25>:•Press <SHIFT> <F1>To access <F26>:•Press <SHIFT> <F2>, and so on.Accessing Function Keys <F31> To <F36>Accessing these keys requires that you press the <SHIFT> key in combination with the <ORANGE> key and the appropriate alpha key.For example, on a QWERTY keyboard:•To access <F31>, press <SHIFT> <ORANGE> and then type the letter q. •To access <F32>, press <SHIFT> <ORANGE> and then type the letter w, and so on.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 39Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Macro Keys – Creating Macros2.3.4.8 The Macro Keys – Creating MacrosImportant: A step-by-step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in “Global Macros” on page 150.7035 hand-held terminals are equipped with four macro keys, and 8255/8260 vehicle-mounts with twelve. These keys can be programmed to insert a text string at the cursor position and can also be programmed to execute the function of the following keys: <ENTER>, <DEL>, <CLR> (<BLUE>-<DEL>), any function key including the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> function keys, and the arrow keys.A macro has 19 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently-used keystrokes, including executable keys. They may also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard.2.4  The IndicatorsTeklogix terminals use LEDs (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and beepers as indicators.2.4.1  LEDsTransmit And ReceiveTwo LEDs indicate the transmit and receive status of data. On the 7035, they are located on the left and right of the <SCAN> key. On the vehicle-mounts, the LEDs are located to the left on the keyboard and are labelled TX and RX•The amber TX (transmit) LED flashes when the terminal transmits data.•The green RX (receive) LED flashes momentarily during the boot process. After boot up, it flashes when the terminal receives data. (Note that if a Mobitex WAN radio is installed in your terminal, the Receive LED may occasionally blink even without a Mobitex network connection because the radio modem sometimes generates a Mobitex packet MPAK on its own,)
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationOnscreen Indicators – 7035 Only40 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualKey Shift LEDs – 8255 And 8260 OnlyThe 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals are equipped with additional LEDs that indicate whether or not a mode key is locked “on”. Mode keys include – <CTRL>, <ALT>, <SHIFT>, <ORANGE> and <BLUE>. When a key is locked “on”, the corresponding LED stays on solidly. If a key has been activated but is not locked “on”, the corresponding LED blinks.2.4.2  Onscreen Indicators – 7035 OnlyOnscreen indicators appear in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen to indicate a variety of terminal conditions. Note: Only the 7035 hand-held terminal is equipped with a status area. The vehicle-mount terminals use LEDs to indicate various terminal states.OnscreenIndicator DescriptionshiftA lowercase shift message indicates that the <SHIFT> key was pressed once. The next numeric key from 0 to 9 that is pressed displays the punctuation mark associated with that key. If both the <SHIFT> and <ORANGE> keys are pressed, the next letter typed appears in uppercase type. Subsequent alpha characters are presented in lowercase type.SHIFTAn uppercase SHIFT message indicates that the <SHIFT> key was pressed twice to lock the key function “on”. Any numeric key from 0 to 9 that is pressed produces the punctuation mark associated with that numeric key until the <SHIFT> key is unlocked or turned “off” by pressing it a third time.If the locked <SHIFT> key is used in conjunction with the <ORANGE> key, all subsequent letters typed appear in uppercase until the <SHIFT> key is unlocked by pressing it a third time.ctrl A lowercase ctrl message indicates that the <CTRL> key was pressed once. The next alphanumeric key pressed generates an ASCII control character. Sub-sequent alphanumeric keys are presented as they appear on the keyboard.CTRLAn uppercase CTRL message indicates that the <CTRL> key was pressed twice to lock the key function “on”. All alphanumeric keys pressed generate ASCII control characters until the <CTRL> key is pressed a third time to unlock it.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 41Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationOnscreen Indicators – 7035 OnlyTable 2.2  7035 Onscreen IndicatorsblueA lowercase blue message indicates that the <BLUE> key was pressed once; it remains active only until the next key is pressed. Any keyboard option coded in blue typeface on the terminal plastic becomes available. (Note: The “One-Shot Mode” parameter (see page 100) can be used to alter the behaviour of the <BLUE> key so that it locks “on” after being pressed only once.)BLUEAn uppercase BLUE message indicates that the <BLUE> key was pressed twice to lock this key function “on”. Keyboard options coded in blue typeface are available until the <BLUE> key is unlocked – pressed a third time. (Note: The “One-Shot Mode” parameter (see page 100) can be used to alter the behaviour of the <BLUE> key so that it locks “on” after being pressed only once.)ORANGEAn uppercase ORANGE message indicates that the <ORANGE> key was pressed once to lock it “on”. The alpha characters printed in orange typeface on the terminal plastic become available. Because it is assumed that the operator will want to enter a string of alpha characters quickly, this is the only key that is locked “on” by default after being pressed only once.KEEP IN MIND that you can change the default key lock function of the <ORANGE> key using the “One-Shot Mode” parameter (see page 100). orangeA lowercase orange message indicates that the <ORANGE> key was pressed once; it is active only until the next key is pressed. The alpha characters printed in orange typeface on the terminal plastic become available. (Note that the “One-Shot Mode” parameter (see page 100) can be used to alter the behav-iour of the <ORANGE> key so that it locks “on” after being pressed only once.)Battery Gauge This horizontal gauge indicates the charge level of the battery.linkA lowercase link message indicates that a radio link has been established but the link is currently in power-down mode, a mode that lowers the consumption of battery power. Note that the absence of a link indicator message (either uppercase or lowercase) indicates that a radio link has not been established.LINK An uppercase LINK message indicates that the radio link is operational. Note that the absence of a link indicator message (either uppercase or lowercase) indicates that a radio link has not been established.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationSoftkeys42 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.4.3  SoftkeysSoftkeys are function keys that are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed. Softkey labels are displayed on the terminal screens to identify the function of the softkeys. Table 2.1 on page 36 lists the functions of these softkeys.2.4.4  The Battery Gauge (7035 Only)A horizontal bar graph, referred to as a battery gauge, is displayed in the status area of the 7035 terminal screen. It keeps track of the percentage of remaining battery power capacity – 0 to 100%, resolution 10% of nominal. The number on the right-hand side of the bar graph indicates the maximum capacity of the battery (in milliampere hours).When the battery capacity is low, the battery gauge blinks and the terminal beeps.Battery life is typically 8 hours minimum. Fast charge time for a Lithium-Ion battery is generally 2.5 hours. Refer to “The 7967 Gang Charger” on page 167 for battery charging details.2.4.5  The BeeperThe terminal beeper sounds under a variety of conditions. Some examples include: a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, the terminal is unlocked, bar code input is accepted or rejected, or an operator’s entry does not match in a match field. The beeper also emulates the function of the “PC speaker” when running DOS applications.There are two ways to adjust the beeper volume – by pressing the <BLUE> key in combination with <F3> and <F4> or by assigning a value in the “Volume” parameter. Both are described in the sections directly following.Note: For instructions on setting beeper duration and frequency, refer to the section titled “Sound” on page 154.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 43Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationBeeper Volume – <BLUE> <F3> And <F4>2.4.5.1 Beeper Volume – <BLUE> <F3> And <F4>Important: When you adjust the beeper volume using the <BLUE> <F3> and <F4> key combination, the new setting is not saved to memory. If the terminal is shut off and powered up again, the volume adjustment is lost.When you adjust the volume using the “Volume” parameter, the change is saved to memory.The beeper volume can be adjusted using the <BLUE> key in combination with function keys <F3> and <F4>.To increase the beeper volume:•Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the <F3> key. Repeat this key combination until the volume is sufficient for your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below. To decrease the beeper volume:•Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the <F4> key. Repeat this key combination until the volume is low enough for your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below. Note: To more efficiently adjust the beeper volume, lock the <BLUE> key “on” by pressing it twice. You can then press the <F3> or <F4> function keys until the beeper volume suits your needs.When you have satisfactorily adjusted the beeper volume, press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off.2.4.5.2 Beeper Volume – The “Volume” ParameterImportant: When you adjust the volume using this parameter, the change is saved to memory.To access the “Volume” parameter:•In the “Parameters” menu, position the cursor on the “System” option, and press <F1>.•Position the cursor on the “Volume” parameter, and enter a value from 0 to 15. The higher the value, the louder the volume.•Press <F4> to save the change.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Display44 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.5  The DisplayTerminals with liquid crystal displays (LCDs) are equipped with backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The 7035 and 8260 terminals have LCDs as a standard feature. The 8255 can be ordered with a vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) or a LCD. If the ambient light is low, the backlight will turn on after a key is pressed, after a scanner decode, or after data is received from the host. The backlight will remain on for a configurable duration. Refer to “Backlight” on page 94 for details about specifying how long the backlight will remain on.2.5.1  Adjusting The Display ContrastNote: Contrast can only be adjusted on terminals with liquid crystal displays.There are two ways to adjust the contrast – by pressing the <BLUE> key in combination with <F1> and <F2> or by assigning a contrast value at the “Contrast” parameter.2.5.1.1 Contrast Adjustment – <BLUE> <F1> And <F2>The LCD (liquid crystal display) contrast is adjustable using the <BLUE> key and function keys <F1> and <F2>.Important: When you adjust the screen contrast using the <BLUE> <F1> and <F2> key combination, the new setting is not saved to memory. If the terminal is shut off and powered up again, the contrast adjustment is lost.If you adjust the contrast using the “Contrast” parameter, the change is saved to memory.To darken the display:•Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F1>. Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 45Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationContrast Adjustment Using The “Contrast” ParameterTo lighten the display:•Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F2>. Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efficiently with these keys, refer to the note below.Note: To more efficiently adjust the display contrast, lock the <BLUE> key “on” by pressing it twice. You can then press the <F1> and <F2> function keys until you can easily read the contents of the terminal screen. When you have satisfactorily adjusted the contrast, press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off.2.5.1.2 Contrast Adjustment Using The “Contrast” ParameterTo access the “Contrast” parameter:•In the “Parameters” menu, position the cursor on the “System” option, and press <F1>.•Position the cursor on the “Contrast” parameter, and enter a value from -10 to 10. The greater the value assigned, the darker the screen contrast – that is, entering a value of 63 results in a very dark screen.2.5.2  PanningThe 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals support autopanning as a default mode. The screen will pan as necessary to ensure the current cursor position is always visible.Note: Refer to “Auto Pan, Left Margin, Right Margin And Bottom Margin” on page 93 for a detailed description of setting parameters for autopanning.The terminals also support manual panning. Refer to “Manual Panning Keys (Arrow Keys)” on page 32 for a description of manual panning.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationThe Integrated Scanner Option – 7035 Only46 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.6  The Integrated Scanner Option – 7035 Only2.6.1  WarningsFor your own safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:1. Do not look into the laser beam.2. CAUTION – Using controls or adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.3. CAUTION – The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.4. This product contains a laser scanner that emits less than 1.0 mW average radiant power at a wavelength of 650 or 680 nm. This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10, 1040.11 and DIN EN 60825: July 1993, and is classified as a Class 2 laser product.2.6.2  Operation Of The Integrated Scanner•Turn the terminal on.Wait until the unit has booted to Tekterm or a DOS prompt.•Test the scanner by pointing it at a light coloured surface and pressing the scan key or the pistol grip trigger. The scanning beam should be energized and the warning indicator (shown in Figure 2.6) should be displayed.Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period, after which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time” on page 104 for details. Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range internal scanners.•Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or two seconds have elapsed. For terminals using external scanners, the warning message can be turned off by setting the “Scan Indic” parameter to “N”. Refer to “Scan Indic – 7035 Only” on page 104 for details.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 47Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationOperation Of The Integrated ScannerNote: 7035 terminals with internal scanners always display this warning indicator, even if the “Scan Indic” parameter is set to “N”.Figure 2.6 7035 Scanner Warning IndicationSuccessful DecodeIf the scanner has successfully read the bar code:•The terminal beeps.•The warning indicator disappears.TroubleshootingIf the scanner is not working, investigate the following:•Is the terminal on?•Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the terminal you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.•Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code.•Check that the bar code is within the proper range (see page 196).•Does the terminal display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the 7035.The terminal can be configured to enable a function (such as <ENTER>) by pressing the trigger twice within a time period which is measured in milliseconds. See “Click Time” on page 103 for more details. This function is independent of the aiming dot override described earlier in this section, under “Operation Of The Integrated Scanner” on page 46 and only applies after a successful scan.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationScanning Techniques48 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual2.6.3  Scanning TechniquesThe Scanner Angle•Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code.Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.Scan Symbol Variations•Scan the entire symbol. The scan beam must cross every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end of the symbol.•Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.•Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.2.7  Infrared (IrDA) Port – 7035 OnlyThe IrDA port is the small red window at the top of the 7035. This port transmits an infrared signal to:•A personal computer with an IrDA serial adaptor.•A printer equipped with an IrDA adaptor.•Any other IrDA compatible device.Important: The IrDA port is connected to the COM1 serial port UART. A serial peripheral connected to COM1 cannot be used while the IrDA port is active.2.8  MaintenanceThis section describes the measures that should be added to your equipment maintenance routine.2.8.1  Cleaning All TerminalsTerminals can be cleaned with mild detergent and water. Ink marks on the keyboard can be removed using a cotton ball moistened with isopropyl alcohol.Warning: Do not immerse the unit in water. Never use strong cleansers.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 49Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation7035 – Special Instructions2.8.2  7035 – Special Instructions•The 7035 terminal has a plastic case that is susceptible to certain chemicals. It is partially soluble in aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons, and slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions. Avoid these solvents. Do not use Loctite brand or other adhesives to secure screws used to attach accessories to the case of the 7035 since the adhesive may damage the plastic (unless the adhesives are specifically formulated for plastics).•The 7035 scanner, IrDA port and display window should be cleaned with a mild detergent and water, as required. Never apply cleaners directly on the terminal – use a cloth dampened with a mild detergent.Warning: To avoid scratching the display and scan windows, do not use abrasive cleansers. 2.8.3  Maintaining The 7035 BatteryImportant: “Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions” on page 161 outlines additional safety precautions. For detailed battery specifications, refer to “Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only)” on page 199. 7035 terminals use Lithium-Ion batteries that do not require conditioning. Each battery pack tracks its own capacity. A horizontal bar graph, referred to as a battery gauge, is displayed in the status area of the terminal screen. It keeps track of the percentage of remaining battery power capacity – 0 to 100%, resolution 10% of nominal. The operator is notified when the battery capacity is low. Battery life is typically 8 hours minimum. Fast charge time for a Lithium-Ion battery is generally 2.5 hours. Refer to “The 7967 Gang Charger” on page 167 for battery charging details.
Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And OperationMaintaining The 7035 Battery50 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualWarning: BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Teklogix for proper disposal. All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following Teklogix offices:Teklogix Inc. Teklogix Corp.2100 Meadowvale Blvd. 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd.Mississauga, Ontario Suite 500L5N 7J9 Erlanger, KentuckyCanada USA 41018Teklogix S.A.Parc Club Du Golf-Bat 1.13856 Aix-En-ProvenceCedex 3; FranceDO NOT DISPOSE OF IN FIRE, mix with other battery types, charge above specified rate, connect improperly, or short circuit the battery. Any of these actions can result in overheating, explosion or leakage of cell contents.DO NOT INCINERATE or subject battery cells to temperatures in excess of 100°C (212°F). Such treatment can vaporize the liquid electrolyte causing cell rupture. Incineration may result in harmful emissions or explosion.DO NOT charge, use or store batteries below -30º C (-22˚ F).Batteries must be handled in accordance with all applicable state and federal laws and regulations.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 51TEKTERM 333.1  Introduction...................................533.2  Launching Tekterm ...............................533.3  Working With Application Session Windows .................543.4  Radio Statistics Screens ............................543.4.1  Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen....................543.4.2  802.11 Radio Statistics Screen......................553.4.3  TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen...........563.4.4  TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen ............573.5  Resetting Radio Statistics ...........................603.6  Exiting Tekterm.................................60
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 53Chapter 3: TektermIntroduction3.1  IntroductionTekterm is a Teklogix DOS application resident on the 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals. It provides real-time terminal emulations that are compatible with Teklogix RF/DC systems.The Tekterm application allows the terminal operator to run up to four TESS and/or ANSI sessions. This application accepts input from the terminal keyboard or from a serial device such as a scanner and provides output to a serial device such as a printer.3.2  Launching TektermNote: Normally, the Tekterm application is automatically launched when the terminal is turned onIf Tekterm is not already running on your terminal, you can launch it from the start-up “Display Menu”.Tekterm is launched through the “Emulations” menu. To launch Tekterm:•8255/8260: Type the letter b. •7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing the letter b.A ParametersB EmulationsC DOS Prompt01 Display Menu
Chapter 3: TektermWorking With Application Session Windows54 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual3.3  Working With Application Session WindowsThe window area in Tekterm contains the active application. It is possible to have one or more application sessions – usually TESS or ANSI – running at the same time. A TESS or ANSI session window occupies the entire terminal screen with other sessions present in the background. Only one application session window can be active at a time.To cycle through the application session windows:•Press <ALT> <F6>.Each time this key combination is pressed, the next session window becomes active.3.4  Radio Statistics ScreensA radio statistics screen is automatically created when TekTerm is started and contains appropriate statistics for the installed radio. Depending on the type of radio installed in your terminal, the radios statistics screen may vary. 3.4.1  Viewing A Radio Statistics ScreenAs described in the previous section, "Working With Application Session Windows", if you are working with multiple sessions, pressing <ALT> <F6> cycles from session to session. The radio statistics screen is always treated as the first session in your terminal. If you’re running only one application session, pressing <ALT> <F6> toggles back and forth between the application session and the radio statistics screen. If you are running multiple sessions, pressing <ALT> <F6> cycles from session to session; when you reach the last session you created, pressing <ALT> <F6> displays the radio statistics screen. If you press <ALT> <F6> at the radio statistics screen, the first application session becomes active once again.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 55Chapter 3: Tekterm802.11 Radio Statistics Screen3.4.2  802.11 Radio Statistics ScreenThe statistics represented in the sample screen above are defined as follows:•CQ communication quality•inpkts total number of received packets•outpkts total number of sent packets•inbyte total number of received bytes•outbyte total number of sent bytes•inerrs total number of received packets with errors•outerrs total number of packet send errors•droppkt total number of dropped packetsCQ 100inpkts 1464outpkts 62inbyte 217590outbyte 5204inerrs 62outerrs 1droppkt 1Statistics
Chapter 3: TektermTRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen56 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual3.4.3  TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics ScreenThe statistics represented in the sample screen above are defined as follows:•cq communication quality•ch operating channel•sc scan state - indicates the current channel search state•xm total number of transmitted messages•xr total number of retransmissions•xi total number of transmitted initialize messages•xe total number of transmit failures (transmission late for responsewindow)•rm total number of received messages•ra total number of received radio link aborts•rp total number of received polls•pt total number of poll timeoutscq 35 ch 20 sc 3xm 17 xr 1xi 4 xe 0rm 21 ra 3rp 106 pt 253Statistics Connection
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 57Chapter 3: TektermTRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen3.4.4  TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics ScreenMobitex NetExample: Mobitex Net C4D7The value indicated at the top of the radio statistics screen is the network identifier of the Mobitex network for which the radio is configured. Possible values are:3B48 MODATA Czech Republic4321 Teklogix Mississauga private    4BCC Mobicom Turkey 4BCC Massinfo Indonesia      A2F7 RAM UK A2F7 United Wireless Australia       B433 BellSouth Wireless Data US      C4D7 Cantel Canada   C4D7 SMTD Singapore C4D7 Telcel Venezuela        EB90 RAM Netherlands EB90 RAM Belgium     EB90 Telenor Norway Mobitex Net C4D7MAN   15100821State LIVE/NO_TRANSFER (0:17)Chan Ar Bs Rssi(dBm)41 31 -583904 -96Rx Txmpak 540 540ok 865 403disc 0 0rejt 0 0rack 0 0Statistics
Chapter 3: TektermTRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen58 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualMANExample: MAN   15100821This number represents the “Mobitex Address Number” of the mobitex radio.StateThe values assigned here indicate the state of communication as follows:Example: State LIVE/NO_TRANSFER (0:17)LIVE/ communication between terminal and Mobitex network is allowedDIE/ terminal is not allowed to communicate with the Mobitex network; contact the network operator/OK communication between terminal and controller is OK/NO_TRANSFER Teklogix Controller is not available (e.g. Controller is down, X.25 connection to Controller is interrupted); contact person responsible for the Controller if the problem persists/CONGEST the Mobitex network is congested; contact the network operator if the problem persists/ERROR technical error in the Mobitex network; contact the network operator if the problem persists/ILLEGAL configuration problem; verify the configuration of the Terminal first (Controller MAN), if Terminal seems properly configured contact the network operator(minutes:seconds) This element is present only if element b is not /OK; it indicates the remaining time until the terminal is /OK to communicate again. Chan Ar Bs Rssi (dBm)This string lists the base stations that the terminal can receive currently along with their signal strength; the first base station in the list is always the current base. (Keep in mind that this entry may be blank if the terminal has no current base station.) The current base is always identified by area and base numbers. Depending on the Mobitex network configuration (frame mode or continuous mode), all other bases are identified by their area and base numbers or by a channel number.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 59Chapter 3: TektermTRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics ScreenExample: Chan Ar Bs Rssi(dBm)Chan Channel number – base transmit, mobile receive – of a particular base station; the channel number is related to the actual frequency as follows:•400 MHz networks: frequency = 380 MHz + channel number * 0.0125 MHz•900 MHz networks: frequency = 890 MHz + channel number * 0.0125 MHzAr Area number. This value is used by network operators to help identify base stations. A group of base stations share one area number.Bs Base station. This value identifies a unique base station in a network.Rssi (dBm) Received signal strength represented in dBm.Receive (Rx) And Transmit (Tx)The values that appear below “Rx” and “Tx” indicate the number bytes received and transmitted in the data portion of an Mobitex packet (MPAK). This is an approximation of the number of bytes for which the user will be charged by the Mobitex network operator.Other Communication IndicatorsTransmit LED The amber Transmit LED to the left of the scan button blinks when a Mobitex packet (MPAK) is successfully transmitted over the radio link – that is, the Mobitex base station has acknowledged the packet.Receive LED The green Receive LED to the right blinks when a Mobitex packet (MPAK) is received. (Note that the Receive LED may occasionally blink even without a Mobitex network connection because the radio modem sometimes generates an MPAK on its own.Link Indicator The “Link” indicator at the bottom-right corner of the display has three states:
Chapter 3: TektermResetting Radio Statistics60 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual1. Blank – The link onscreen message does not appear. The radio is outside the Mobitex network coverage area.2. Link (lowercase) – The radio is in the Mobitex network coverage area but the Teklogix controller could not be reached as yet; this may indicate problems with the X.25 link to the controller, or there may be problems with the controller itself (e.g., software malfunction).3. LINK (uppercase) – The radio is in the Mobitex network coverage area and the link to the Teklogix controller is operating.3.5  Resetting Radio StatisticsTo reset the radio statistics to 0 (zero):•8255/8260: Type z.•7035: Press <ORANGE>, and type z.3.6  Exiting TektermTo exit Tekterm:•8255/8260: Press <ALT> and type x.•7035: Press <ALT><ORANGE> x.When you exit Tekterm, the “Display Menu” described in “Launching Tekterm” on page 53 appears on the terminal screen.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 61TESS OPERATIONS 444.1  Configuration ..................................634.2  Working With Multiple Sessions ........................634.3  The Field Types.................................644.4  Data Entry ...................................644.4.1  TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement................654.4.2  <CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS.....................664.4.3  <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS.....................674.5  Lock Messages .................................694.6  Control Commands...............................69
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 63Chapter 4: TESS OperationsConfigurationTESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the normal operating mode of Teklogix terminals. Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Teklogix Software Development Kit (SDK) installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands. The 9140 Wireless Gateway and the 9150 Access Point are also equipped with protocol emulation software.Note: If the message “RESET: Press Enter” flashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the terminal, press the <ENTER> key once.4.1  ConfigurationNote: Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it. Refer to “Applications” on page 115 for more details. The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 115.A unique terminal number must be assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter for each TESS session. Refer to “Terminal #” in the section titled “TESS Settings” on page 126 for details.4.2  Working With Multiple SessionsWhen Tekterm is launched, the first configured session will appear in the screen area. To display the next session in Tekterm when multiple sessions are running:•Press <ALT> <F6>.Each time this key combination is pressed, the next session window becomes active.
Chapter 4: TESS OperationsThe Field Types64 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual4.3  The Field TypesFixed Field – displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard.Entry Field – allows the operator to enter data. This type of field is usually shown as: “........”Match Field – the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry. If the entered data does not match the expected format, the terminal emits a long beep.Auto-tab Field – automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled.Bar code only Field – is filled with data from a bar code reader. Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field.Serial I/O Field – is filled with data coming from a serial port. Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of field.4.4  Data EntryThe terminal accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer. The following actions cause the terminal to transmit:•Pressing a function key or the <ENTER> key (which is considered to be <F0>) causes the terminal to transmit.•Completing data entry into a “transmit on entry” field also causes the terminal to transmit.There are several ways to configure the terminal to complete a data field:•Pressing <ENTER> after entering data.•Pressing a function key after entering data.•Pressing an arrow key after entering data.•Filling an auto-tab field.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 65Chapter 4: TESS OperationsTESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement4.4.1  TESS Edit Modes And Cursor MovementThe TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in Table 4.1.Table 4.1  Edit ModesNote: When the “Enter on Arr” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys do not complete an entry field. See page 136 for details about this parameter.Field modePress <CTRL> fto enter field mode. In this mode, once data entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field.In field mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys do not perform any functions. Pressing the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key completes the entry field and then, moves the cursor to the previous or next field.Fcursor modePress <CTRL> uto enter fcursor mode. In this mode, once data entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field.In fcursor mode, the <UP>, <DOWN>, <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys move the cursor between fields.Insert modePress <CTRL> ito enter insert mode. In this mode, data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered.In insert mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field.Replace modePress <CTRL> rto enter replace mode. In this mode, data can be entered over previously entered characters.In replace mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previ-ous or next field.
Chapter 4: TESS Operations<CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS66 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual4.4.2  <CLR> Key Behaviour In TESSField mode•In a left justified field, the <CLR> key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the left most position of that field. •In a right justified field, the <CLR> key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field. •If the <CLR> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message.Replace mode•In both left and right justified fields, the <CLR> key erases charac-ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field. The cursor remains in the same position in the field. •If the <CLR> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the field, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. •If the <CLR> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. Insert mode•In both left and right justified fields, the <CLR> key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field. •If the <CLR> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the field, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. •If the <CLR> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. Fcursor mode •Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <CLR> key operates in the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in “Field mode”.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 67Chapter 4: TESS Operations<DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS4.4.3  <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESSField mode•In a left justified field, the <DEL> key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor on position to the left. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is opened. •In a right justified field, the <DEL> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is opened. •If the <DEL> key is pressed when the field is empty, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep.•The <DEL> key does not delete data pre-filled by the host applica-tion.•If the <DEL> key is pressed in a field that has not been modified, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. •If data is entered into a field, and it is then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted. Replace mode•In a left justified field, the <DEL> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string; in this case, the <DEL> key erases the charac-ter to the left of the cursor.•In a right justified field, the <DEL> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned. The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor is shifted to the right by one posi-tion.•If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of the field, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right most position in the field.•When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty – that is, any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the <DEL> key in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep.•The <DEL> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application. •If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is com-pleted, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted.
Chapter 4: TESS Operations<DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS68 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualInsert mode•In a left justified field, the <DEL> function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned, unless it is at the right end of the char-acter string; in this case, it erases the character to the left of the cursor. When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty, and any further <DEL> functions in the empty field result in a key-board error beep. •In a right justified field, the <DEL> function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position. •If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of that field, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right-most position in the field.•When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty – i.e. any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the DEL key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep. •The <DEL> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application. •If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is com-pleted, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted.Fcursor mode •Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <DEL> key operates in exactly the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in “Field mode”.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 69Chapter 4: TESS OperationsLock Messages4.5  Lock MessagesWhen information is transmitted to the host computer, the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the terminal receives a reply. A locked state isindicated by either “LOCK-B” (base) or “LOCK-H” (host) in the lower left corner of the display.When the reply is received by the terminal, the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again.4.6  Control CommandsA group of <CTRL> key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the terminal will operate under a variety of conditions.•<CTRL> p  – Reprints the last print page sent from the host. This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the terminal.•<CTRL> s – Displays the terminal status continuously. Below is a sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your terminals screen:Lock-B/Lock-H fld enh “application name”•<CTRL> w – Displays the terminal when the terminal is in “Lock B” or “Lock H” mode. The status line would be similar to the sample above.•<CTRL> t – Displays the terminal status with the terminal number instead of the name.Lock-B/Lock-H rep “terminal nn”•<CTRL> h – Displays a menu of available hosts.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 71ANSI OPERATIONS 555.1  Configuration ..................................735.2  Sending Data To The Host ...........................735.3  Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys ...............745.4  Working With Sessions .............................755.4.1  Establishing A New Session .......................755.4.2  Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions ............755.4.3  Closing A Session ............................765.4.4  Printing A Screen ............................765.4.5  Smart Echo – Disabling .........................76
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 73Chapter 5: ANSI OperationsConfigurationThe Teklogix terminal in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals. This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes.5.1  ConfigurationTo configure the terminal for ANSI mode, the “Name” and “Type” of session – in this case, ANSI – must be specified in the Applications menu. This menu is described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 115.Next, a unique terminal number must be assigned using the “Terminal #” parameter. This number should be unique across the entire system – that is, each terminal and each application session in each terminal across your system must have a unique number assigned. This parameter is described in the section titled “ANSI Settings” on page 116.When Tekterm is launched, the first configured session will appear in the application. To display the next session in Tekterm when multiple sessions are running:•Press <ALT> <F6>.Each time this key combination is pressed, the next session window becomes active.5.2  Sending Data To The HostTeklogix terminals running ANSI transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed.The terminal also responds immediately to the device attribute requests “CSIc”, “CSI0c” and “ESCZ”.Note: For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI, refer to “ANSI Settings” on page 116.
Chapter 5: ANSI OperationsTeklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys74 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual5.3  Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent KeysThe Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals. Table 5.1 maps the equivalent VT220 keys.Table 5.1  Teklogix Terminal Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent KeysTeklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key<UP> arrow Up arrow<DOWN> arrow Down arrow<RIGHT> arrow Right arrow<LEFT> arrow Left arrow<F1>-<F4> PF1-PF4<F5> None<F6>-<F10> F6-F10<F11> F11 (ESC)<F12> F12 (BS)<F13> F13 (LF)<F14> F14<F15> Help<F16> Do<F17>-<F20> F17-F20<F21> Find<F22> Insert Here<F23> Remove<F24> Select<F25> Previous Screen<F26> Next Screen<F27>-<F36> None
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 75Chapter 5: ANSI OperationsWorking With Sessions5.4  Working With SessionsImportant: Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the “TCP >” prompt.5.4.1  Establishing A New Session•8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.•7035: Press <CTRL> <ORANGE>, and type a lowercase a.At the TCP> prompt:•Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address.•Press <ENTER>.•Log in as usual to begin working with the new session.5.4.2  Listing Sessions And Moving To Other SessionsTo list the current sessions:•8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.•7035: Press <CTRL><ORANGE>, and type a lowercase a.At the TCP> prompt:•Type sess in lowercase letters, and press <ENTER>.To move to another session:•At the TCP> prompt, type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move.e.g., Type sess 2 to move to session 2.•Press <ENTER>.
Chapter 5: ANSI OperationsClosing A Session76 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual5.4.3  Closing A SessionTo close a session:•8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a.•At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close.e.g., Type cl 2 to close session 2.•Press <ENTER>.•7035: Press <CTRL><ORANGE>, and type a lowercase a.•At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters.•Press <ORANGE> again to turn Alpha mode off, and then type the session number you want to close.e.g., Press <ORANGE>, type cl , press <ORANGE> again, and type 2 to close session 2.•Press <ENTER>.5.4.4  Printing A ScreenTo print each line of a screen with a CR/LF between each line:•8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type p.•7035: Press <CTRL> <ORANGE>, and type p.The screen will be printed using the port configured as “Print”.5.4.5  Smart Echo – DisablingIn some circumstances – like entering a password – you many want to temporarily disable “smart echo”, disguising the characters you type with ‘.’ (periods).•8255/8260: Press <ALT> <ORANGE>, and type a ‘.’ (period).•Type the necessary information using the terminal keyboard, and then press <ENTER> to return to “smart echo mode.•7035: Press <ALT>, and then type a ‘.’ (period).•Type the necessary information, and then press <ENTER> to return to “smart echo mode.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 77SETTING PARAMETERS 666.1  Using The Parameter Manager .........................816.2  Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu ..............816.3  Working With Menus..............................836.3.1  Softkey Function Keys ..........................836.3.2  Displaying Sub-Menus..........................846.3.3  Numeric Parameters ...........................846.3.4  Y/N Parameters..............................856.3.5  Alpha Parameters.............................856.3.6  String Entry Parameters .........................856.3.6.1  Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys .....866.3.6.2  Adding Additional ASCII Characters .............866.3.6.3  Entering Information In A String Entry Field .........866.3.7  Saving Changes To Parameters .....................876.3.8  Resetting The Terminal .........................876.3.8.1  Resetting The 7035.......................876.3.8.2  Resetting The 8255 And 8260 .................876.3.9  Resetting Parameters To Default Values .................876.4  Terminal Parameters ..............................886.4.1  Displaying The Parameters Menu ....................886.5  System .....................................906.5.1  Volume And Contrast ..........................906.5.2  Key Click.................................916.5.3  Typematic Rpt ..............................916.5.4  Panning..................................926.5.5  Backlight .................................946.5.5.1  7035 Backlight Parameters...................946.5.5.2  8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters .............956.5.6  Code Page ................................956.5.7  Font Size – North American And European ...............966.5.8  Font Size – Chinese And Korean ....................97
78 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.5.9  Palette Remap..............................986.5.10  Watchdog Timer ............................996.5.11  Power – 7035 Only ..........................996.5.12  One-Shot Mode ............................1006.6  Scanner ....................................1016.6.1  Type...................................1016.6.2  Options .................................1026.6.2.1  Translate............................1026.6.2.2  Other Options .........................1036.6.3  Barcode .................................1056.6.3.1  Code 39 ............................1056.6.3.2  Code 128 ...........................1076.6.3.3  EAN 13 ............................1086.6.3.4  EAN 8 .............................1106.6.3.5  UPC A.............................1116.6.3.6  UPC E .............................1126.6.3.7  Codabar ............................1136.6.3.8  Code 93 ............................1136.6.3.9  Code 11 ............................1136.6.3.10  I 2 of 5 ............................1146.6.3.11  MSI/PLESSY ........................1146.6.3.12  D 2 of 5 ...........................1156.7  Applications ..................................1156.7.1  ANSI Settings..............................1166.7.1.1  Host Conn ...........................1176.7.1.2  Screen .............................1176.7.1.3  Char Set – North American And European ..........1196.7.1.4  Char Set – Chinese And Korean ...............1216.7.1.5  Video .............................1226.7.1.6  Transmit............................1236.7.1.7  Keyboard ...........................1246.7.2  Serial ..................................1266.7.3  TESS Settings..............................1266.7.3.1  Host Conn ...........................1276.7.3.2  Screen .............................1276.7.3.3  Characters ...........................1296.7.3.4  Char Set ............................130
79 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.7.3.5  Serial .............................1336.7.3.6  Tests ..............................1346.7.3.7  Scanner ............................1346.7.3.8  Fields .............................1366.7.4  Features .................................1386.8  View Manager.................................1396.9  Ports– Serial 1 And Console 2 ........................1416.9.1  Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options ..............1416.9.2  Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings...............1426.9.3  Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad ............1446.9.4  Setting The Terminal Console Port For Scan-See ...........1446.9.4.1  Scan-See Parameters .....................1446.9.4.4  Scan-See Display – Mapping The "Viewport" ........1456.10  Global Macros ................................1506.10.1  Displaying The Global Macros Menu.................1506.10.2  Displaying The Global Macros Table .................1516.10.3  Choosing An ASCII Character ....................1526.10.4  Adding Additional ASCII Characters .................1526.10.5  Programming Special Keys Into Macros ...............1536.11  Network ...................................1536.12  Radio.....................................1546.13  Sound ....................................154
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 81Chapter 6: Setting ParametersUsing The Parameter Manager6.1  Using The Parameter ManagerWarning: Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties. Generally, parameters are configured for each site during installation.The Parameter Manager provides access to the parameter menus. The values assigned to the parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which a terminal is operating.6.2  Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display MenuNormally, the Tekterm application is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on. To launch the Parameters menu, you first need to exit the Tekterm application:•8255/8260: Press <ALT>, and type the letter x.•7035: Press <ALT> <ORANGE>, and type the letter x.The start up “Display Menu” appears on the terminal screen. From this menu, you can launch the “Parameters” menu, relaunch the Tekterm application, or go to the DOS prompt.To access any of these options, type the letter corresponding to the item you want to access. To launch the “Parameters” menu:•8255/8260: Type the letter a.•7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing a.A ParametersB EmulationsC DOS Prompt01 Display Menu
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersExiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu82 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualA Password screen is displayed.Note: A password is not requested when the terminal emulation application is launched.A supervisory or a Teklogix level password is required to display the complete“Parameters” menu or to go to the DOS prompt.Important: If you’re using a 7035 hand-held and your password consists of numeric rather than alphabetic characters, remember to press the <ORANGE> key a second time to turn it off before entering your numeric password. Check the status area at the bottom of the screen to make sure the onscreen indicator “ORANGE” is no longer displayed.•Type your password, and press <ENTER>.When the correct password is entered, a Change screen is displayed.Do not enter a value in the Change screen if you do not want to change your password. To display the “Parameters” menu without changing your password:•Press <ENTER> at the Change screen.. . . . . .Password. . . . . .Change
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 83Chapter 6: Setting ParametersWorking With MenusChanging A PasswordWhen you type your password correctly in the Password screen, the Change screen is displayed. A password can have up to six alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive. It is set at the factory to “123456”. To change your password:•Type the new password in the Change screen, and press <ENTER>.If you change your password, set all the terminals to the same password, write it down, and keep it in a secure place. If the password is lost, the parameters can only be changed by Teklogix personnel.6.3  Working With MenusAll parameters are listed in menus. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys are used to move the cursor up and down the current menu. The currently selected parameter name is displayed in reverse video. To help you work with the parameters and menus, a set of pre-programmed function keys – <F1> through <F4> – can be used to move back and forth between menus and save changes made to any parameters.There are four types of parameters: numeric, Y/N, alpha and string entry. In addition, some menus have sub-menus attached to them. This section of the manual describes how to work with all types of parameters and sub-menus.6.3.1  Softkey Function KeysTo speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters, function keys <F1> to <F4> have been programmed to perform specific actions. Table 6.1 describes these function keys.Table 6.1  SoftkeysFunction Key Softkey Function<F1> NEXT – Displays the next sub-menu<F2> PREV – Displays the previous menu.<F3> DEFLT – Restores parameters to default settings – even after pressing <F4> to save the changes.<F4 SAVE – Saves a change to a parameter value.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersDisplaying Sub-Menus84 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.3.2  Displaying Sub-MenusThe “»” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub-menu.Displaying Sub-MenusTo display a sub-menu:•Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub-menu you want to display.•Press <F1> – the “NEXT” menu function key.Returning To The Previous Menu•Press <F2> – the “PREV” function key, or•Press <ESC>.6.3.3  Numeric ParametersNumeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. To increment or decrement a number:•Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys, or•Type the desired number in the field. Negative values are entered by typing a “-” (minus) sign and then the number. •Press <ENTER>.Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example, a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 85Chapter 6: Setting ParametersY/N Parameters6.3.4  Y/N ParametersY/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable a Y/N parameter:•Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key once, or•Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter. If you’re using a 7035, remember to press the <ORANGE> key before typing y or n. Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right arrow (») appears next to the “Y” or “N”.6.3.5  Alpha ParametersAlpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words. To cycle through the set:•Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys.6.3.6  String Entry ParametersImportant: For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys, refer to “Global Macros” on page 150.A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter. When a string entry parameter contains data, it is displayed in reverse video. (Empty fields are not displayed in reverse video.) The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section.In string entry parameters, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and <DEL> keys have the following functions:•The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow.•<ENTER> completes the entry field.•<DEL> deletes the character to the left of the cursor.•<CLR> (key combination <BLUE> <DEL>) clears the entire field.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChoosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys86 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.3.6.1 Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow KeysImportant: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off! By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard. The ASCII sets differ slightly depending on the type of terminal you’re using.7035: / < > % ^ & ` ~ | [ ] { } " ' ? = + ;8255/8260: ^ & ‘ ~ | [ ] { } ’ " •Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one.6.3.6.2 Adding Additional ASCII CharactersWhen you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right.To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve already chosen:•Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.•Next, press the <DEL> keyThe cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.•Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character.6.3.6.3 Entering Information In A String Entry FieldIn addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter, you can also type text in a string entry field.•Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers and symbols.•Press <ENTER> to save the text.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 87Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSaving Changes To Parameters6.3.7  Saving Changes To ParametersWhenever a parameter value is altered, the new value must be saved. To do this:•Press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key.If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved, a dialog box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes.6.3.8  Resetting The TerminalNote: Regardless of the type of terminal you are using, a reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit. When the terminal is reset, it reboots to the Tekterm application and parameter changes take effect.6.3.8.1 Resetting The 7035To reset a 7035:•Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds.6.3.8.2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260To reset an 8255 or 8260:•Using the On/Off switch, turn the terminal off and back on again.6.3.9  Resetting Parameters To Default ValuesImportant: When <F3> – the DEFAULT key – is pressed, all parameter values revert to the factory defaults, including those values that you’ve changed and saved.•Press <F3> – the “DEFAULT” function key – to reinstate the default parameter values.•Press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key – to save the changes.•Reset the terminal. See "Resetting The Terminal" above.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersTerminal Parameters88 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.4  Terminal ParametersWarning: Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties. Generally, parameters are configured for each site during installation.The “Parameters” menus can only be accessed by individuals with the proper security password. Security is divided into two levels: Supervisory and Teklogix Personnel passwords. Important: Only individuals with a supervisory or Teklogix personnel level password can access and change these parameters.6.4.1  Displaying The Parameters MenuThe “Parameters” application is launched from the start up “Display Menu”. If your terminal is currently in the Tekterm application:•8255/8260: Press <ALT>, and type the letter x.•7035: Press <ALT><ORANGE>, and type the letter x to exit Tekterm.The “Display Menu” appears on your screen.A ParametersB EmulationsC DOS Prompt01 Display Menu
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 89Chapter 6: Setting ParametersDisplaying The Parameters MenuTo display the “Parameters” menu from the startup “Display” menu:•8255/8260: Type the letter a.•7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing a.The Parameters menu is a first level menu that contains parameters for the configuration and customization of a terminal. To access sub-menus attached to these parameters:•Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the appropriate menu item.•Press <F1> – the “NEXT” key – to display the sub-menu.To display the previous menu:•Press <F2> – the “PREVIOUS” key, or•Press the <ESC> key.System »Scanner »Applications »View Manager »Ports »Global Macros »Network »Radio »Sound »Parameters
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSystem90 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.5  SystemThe parameters listed under the “System” menu allow you to customize terminal attributes such as volume, contrast and font size.Note: The “Code Page” parameter is not available in the Chinese and Korean versions of this software.6.5.1  Volume And ContrastBoth the terminal beeper volume and the screen contrast can be adjusted using the <BLUE> key in combination with function keys <F1> to <F4>. However, these changes are not saved to memory – that is, when the terminal is reset, any volume and contrast adjustments are lost. For information on manual beeper volume adjustments, refer to “Beeper Volume – <BLUE> <F3> And <F4>” on page 43. For details on manual contrast adjustments, refer to “Contrast Adjustment – <BLUE> <F1> And <F2>” on page 44.Adjustments made to the terminal beeper and the display using the “Volume” and “Contrast” parameters are saved to memory so that if the terminal is turned off or reset, the adjustments are saved.VolumeThe “Volume” parameter is used to adjust the beeper volume of the terminal beeper. The higher the value entered, the louder the beeper volume of the terminal. When a volume adjustment is made using this parameter, it is saved to memory.Volume 9 0..15Contrast -5 -10..10Key Click Y » see textTypematic Rpt Y » see textPanning » see textBacklight » see textCode Page 850 437-850Font Size » see textPalette Remap » see textWatchdog timer 0 0..30Power » see textOne-Shot Mode » see textRangeSystem
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 91Chapter 6: Setting ParametersKey ClickContrastNote: The “Contrast” parameter is not available for 8255 terminals equipped with vacuum fluorescent displays.This parameter is used to adjust the terminal screen contrast. The higher the value assigned, the darker the screen contrast.6.5.2  Key ClickThe parameters provided in the Key Click sub-menu are used to adjust the sound emitted from the terminal when a key is pressed. When “Key Click” is set to Y, an audible sound is emitted from the terminal with each key pressed. Setting this parameter to “N” disables the key click sound.ToneThe value entered in the “Tone” parameter determines the frequency of the key clicks and is measured in Hz. The higher the value, the higher the pitch.DurationThe value entered in the “Duration” parameter measures the length of time a sound is emitted when a key is pressed and is measured in milliseconds.6.5.3  Typematic RptWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), pressing and holding down an alphanumeric key will cause that character to repeat until the key is released.Tone 2675 200-5000Duration 75 25-150RangeKey clickDelay 500 ms see textRate 5 cps 1 cps..10 cpsTest see textRangeTypematic rpt
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersPanning92 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualDelayThe value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. The allowable values are: 150 ms, 200 ms, 250 ms, 300 ms, 350 ms, 400 ms, 450 ms and 500 ms.RateThe value assigned for the “Rate” parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). The allowable values range from 1 cps to 10 cps.TestThis parameter is provided as a test field. Once you’ve enabled (set to “Y”) the “Typematic rpt” parameter and assigned a “Delay” and “Rate” value, position your cursor in this field, press and hold down an alphanumeric key to test the rate of character repeats.6.5.4  PanningImportant: The “Auto Pan” feature that is tailored by these parameters is used by the DOS command line or by applications that do not provide auto panning (e.g., the Parameters menus).Tekterm is equipped with it’s own panning capabilities and does not execute panning as described in this section.Auto pan y Y/NLeft margin 5 0-25Right margin 1 0-25Bottom margin 1 0-20X increment 1 1-40Y increment 1 1-12RangePanning
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 93Chapter 6: Setting ParametersPanningAuto Pan, Left Margin, Right Margin And Bottom MarginNote: The “X increment” and “Y increment” parameters are used for manual panning only. Auto panning relies on the values set in the “Left margin”, “Right margin” and “Bottom margin” parameters.“Auto Pan” is used to enable and disable auto panning. When it is enabled (set to “Y”), the values set in the “Left Margin”, “Right Margin” and “Bottom Margin” are used to determine the number of characters that will always be visible to the left and right of the cursor and the number of lines that will always be visible below the cursor. If the cursor moves beyond the value specified, the entire contents of the screen are panned or shifted to comply with the values set in the margin parameters.Example: The value set in the “Left Margin” and “Right Margin” is 2. The value set in the “Bottom Margin” is 3. This specifies that 2 characters must always be displayed to the left and right of the cursor, and 3 lines must always be displayed below the cursor (Bottom Margin). The contents of the screen will not auto pan or shift until the cursor is moved past the minimum specified in a margin parameter. If the cursor is moved past the “Left Margin” setting, the screen pans to the right. If the cursor moves past the “Right Margin” setting, the screen pans to the left. If the cursor is moved beyond the “Bottom Margin” setting, the screen contents pan up.X Increment And Y IncrementManual panning – shifting the contents of the screen using the <BLUE> key in combination with the <LEFT>, <RIGHT>, <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys – relies on the values set in “X Increment” and “Y Increment” to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows (lines) to pan or shift.“X Increment” determines the number of spaces the screen pans to the left or right when the <BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key.“Y Increment” determines the number of lines the screen pans up or down when the <BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersBacklight94 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.5.5  BacklightBacklight parameters vary depending on the type of terminal used – 7035 hand-held 8255 or 8260 vehicle-mount.6.5.5.1 7035 Backlight ParametersThresholdThe 7035 is equipped with automatic light sensing. The value entered in this parameter determines how dark the ambient light needs to be before the backlight turns on. The higher the value, the darker the ambient light must be before the backlight turns on.On TimeThe value entered in this parameter determines how long the backlight will stay on after a key is pressed, a scan is completed or data is received. “On Time” is measured in seconds. The allowable values are: Disabled, 5 secs, 10 secs, 15 secs, 20 secs, 30 secs, 60 secs and Always On. Choosing Disabled turns the backlight feature off. Choosing Always On sets the backlight to stay on constantly, whether or not a key is pressed or data is received.IntensityThis parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7035 terminal screen. The higher the value, the greater the screen light intensity.Threshold 192 0..255On Time 60 sec see textIntensity 0 -5..5RangeBacklight
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 95Chapter 6: Setting Parameters8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters6.5.5.2 8255 And 8260 Backlight ParametersScreenImportant: 8255 terminals with vacuum fluorescent displays do not require a “Screen” backlighting option. They offer only the “Keyboard” backlighting option.The value assigned for the “Screen” parameter determines how long the backlight will stay on after a key is pressed, a scan is completed or data is received. This parameter is measured in minutes. The allowable values are: 10 mins, 15 mins, 20 mins, 30 mins, 60 mins and Always On. Choosing Always On sets the backlight to stay on constantly, whether or not a key is pressed or data is received.KeyboardThis parameter determines how long the keyboard backlight stays on after a key is pressed. The “Keyboard” parameter is measured in seconds and minutes.The allowable values are: Disabled, 5 secs, 10 secs, 20 secs, 30 secs, 1 min, 2 mins, 4 mins and Always On. As you may have guessed, Disabled turns off the keyboard backlight while Always On sets the backlight to stay on at all times.6.5.6  Code PageThe code page files accessible from this parameter contain the entire font library supported by your terminal. It is set to code page 850 by default as this page supports a large variety of characters useful in Canada, the U.S. and Europe. The U.S. code page is 437. Refer to a Microsoft Windows and MS DOS or an IBM DOS code page reference book for code page details.Screen Always On see textKeyboard 10 secs see textRangeBacklight
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersFont Size – North American And European96 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.5.7  Font Size – North American And EuropeanImportant: Because the 8260 vehicle-mount terminal is equipped with a full size, 25 x 80 display, full screens can easily be displayed without reducing the font size. For this reason, the 8260 does not provide a Font menu .This parameter is used to change the font size displayed on the 7035 hand-held terminal and the 8255 vehicle-mount terminals. Font sizes are represented as lines x characters. Font availability varies depending on the type of terminal in use. Each terminal type offers only those font sizes that it supports. •Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys to scroll through the available fonts sizes. 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Display Fonts8255 Liquid Crystal Display Fonts8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)10x5110x4210x325x425x328255 Liquid Crystal Display(LCD)25x8014x8012x80
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 97Chapter 6: Setting ParametersFont Size – Chinese And Korean7035 Fonts6.5.8  Font Size – Chinese And KoreanImportant: Chinese and Korean characters are double-byte characters – one double-byte character occupies two single-width character positions. The font sizes available for the Chinese and Korean character sets are measured in single-width characters. 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) Fonts8255 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Fonts8260 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Fonts7035 Display18x3218x2618x2010x2610x209x20Chinese Font Sizes8255 VFD Korean Font Sizes8255 VFD4x32 5x32Chinese Font Sizes8255 LCD Korean Font Sizes8255 LCD11x80 12x80Chinese Font Sizes8260 LCD Korean Font Sizes8260 LCD25x80 25x80
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersPalette Remap98 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7035 Fonts6.5.9  Palette RemapA DOS-based application generally uses a VGA colour palette. On Teklogix terminals, these colours are converted to grey scale with varying degrees of success. While grey scale displays well on a 7035 hand-held terminal, it does not display as well on an 8255 LCD or an 8260 vehicle-mount terminal. The “Palette Remap” parameter allows you to substitute default application colours with colours that will display well on your Teklogix terminal.Note: All built-in Teklogix software uses only intense white (VGA index 15) and black (VGA index 0), both of which display well on Teklogix terminals.The values on the left-hand side of the “Palette Remap” screen represent the original VGA palette; these values cannot be changed. The values on the right-hand side of this screen can be altered to remap colours as they reach your Teklogix terminal display. For example, suppose that you want your terminal to always replace the colour red with the colour black. You need to change the red colour value of 4 to the black colour value of 0.Chinese Font Sizes7035 Korean Font Sizes70358x20 9x20[0] Black [0][1] Blue [1][2] Green [2][3] Cyan [3][4] Red [4][5] Magenta [5][6] Brown [6][7] Lt Grey [7][8] Dark Grey [8][9] Lt Blue [9][a] Lt Green [a][b] Lt Cyan [b][c] Lt Red [c][d] Lt Magenta [d][e] Yellow [e][f] White [f]Palette Remap
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 99Chapter 6: Setting ParametersWatchdog TimerTo remap a colour:•Highlight the colour you want to remap, and press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key until the colour value you want is displayed.•Press <F4> to save your changes, and reset the terminal. (See page 87 for terminal reset information.)6.5.10  Watchdog TimerSetting this parameter to Enabled signals the terminal to reboot automatically whenever control of the terminal is not periodically returned to a system monitor program (running in the background). This allows for recovery from programs that “crash” or “hang” the terminal.If “Watchdog Timer” is set to Disabled, the terminal will not reboot automatically under the circumstances described above.6.5.11  Power – 7035 OnlyPower DownWhen the amount of time specified in the “Power Down” parameter expires without any activity, the terminal goes into suspend mode, a power-saving mode. Pressing any key reinstates full power mode.The possible values for this parameter are: Disabled, 1 min, 2 mins, 4 mins, 8 mins, 16 mins, 32 mins and 60 mins.Power down 4 mins see textPower off 1 hour see textRangePower
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersOne-Shot Mode100 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualPower OffImportant: The value assigned for this parameter is not recognized until the value in the “Power Down” parameter has expired.When the time specified for the “Power Off” parameter has expired, the terminal turns off. A full reboot is required to return the terminal to full operating mode.The allowable values for this parameter are: Disabled, 1 min, 8 mins, 16 mins, 32 mins, 1 hour, 2 hours and 4 hours.This parameter timeout occurs whether the terminal is turned on or off. That is, even if the terminal is switched off, it will return to its last operating state when switched on. If it is left ‘off’ for the time period specified by this parameter, a full reboot will occur when switched back on.6.5.12  One-Shot ModeIn “One Shot” mode, a key is only active until the next key is pressed. To lock a key “ON”, it must be pressed twice. When a key is locked on, it remains active until it is pressed a third time to deactivate it.The “One Shot” menu allows you to configure the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys to operate in one shot mode or to lock “ON” automatically after being pressed only once.Orange KeyBy default, the <ORANGE> key automatically locks” ON” after being pressed once. If you prefer that this key only remain active until the next key is pressed (one shot mode):•Set the “Orange Key” parameter to “Y”.To set this key to lock “ON” automatically after being pressed only once:•Set the “Orange Key parameter to “N”.Orange Key N Y/NBlue Key Y Y/NRangeOne Shot Mode
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 101Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScannerBlue KeyThe <BLUE> key is set to one shot mode by default – it is only active until the next key is pressed.To set this key to lock “ON” automatically after being pressed only once:•Set the “Blue Key” parameter to “N”.To set the <BLUE> key to one shot mode:•Set the “Blue Key” parameter to “Y”.6.6  Scanner6.6.1  TypeThe Type sub-menu allows the user to identify the type of internal and/or external scanner being used. The 7035 hand-held terminal can support both an internal and an external scanner at the same time.Int – 7035 OnlyThe “Int” (internal) parameter identifies the type of internal scanner installed in the 7035 – Long Range, High Visibility or Standard range. If an internal scanner has not been installed, set this parameter to None.ExtThe “Ext” (external) parameter identifies the type of external scanner attached to the terminal – Wand or Non-Decoded. If an external scanner is not being used, set this parameter to None.Type »Options »Barcode »ScannerInt none None, Long Range, High Vis, StandardExt none None, Wand, Non-DecodedRangeType
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersOptions102 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.6.2  Options6.6.2.1 TranslateImportant: For detailed instructions on inserting characters or special keys (e.g., <ENTER>, <DEL>, etc.) in these fields, refer to "Global Macros" on page 150 to page 153.In #nThis string entry parameter is compared with the decoded bar code reading. If there is a match, the “Out” string is translated into the decoded bar code. The first character of the “In” string specifies where the rest of the string can occur within the decoded bar code reading.The possible values for this character include:bCompare with the beginning of decoded bar code.eCompare with the end of decoded bar code.xCompare with the entire decoded bar code.aCompare anywhere within the decoded bar code (default).Note: Translation of the decoded bar code occurs after all other modifications Translate » see textVerify 0 0..15Security 0 0..99Short Code N Y/NClick Time 250 0..1000Click Data 0..255Scan Result Y Y/NScan Indic Y Y/NDot Time 2.0 sec 0..3.0 SecOptions RangeIn #1Out #1...In #8Out #8Translate
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 103Chapter 6: Setting ParametersOther Optionsto the bar code have been done (e.g., prefix char, suffix char, strip, etc.).Out #nIf there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding “In” string, the decoded bar code will be translated into the “Out” string. This string entry parameter can be null, or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters (e.g., function keys, <ENTER>, etc.).6.6.2.2 Other OptionsVerifyThe value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code.SecurityThis parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes (Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code.Short CodeWhen enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes (2 characters). When “Short Code” is disabled (set to “N”), these short bar codes are rejected.Setting this parameter to “Y” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the terminal must decode more potential bar codes. For this reason, it is not recommended that “Short Code” be enabled for general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters.Click TimeNote: This parameter only effects terminals using long-range scanners.This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. A value of zero disables this feature.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersOther Options104 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualA double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter (see page 104). When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.Click DataFor both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to TESS or ANSI following a double-click. Enter the ASCII value of the character desired. You can also press the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys to scroll through a set of ASCII characters not available from the keyboard.Scan Result – 7035 OnlyWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the terminal screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and only as long as the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen.Scan Indic – 7035 OnlyWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated. For the Teklogix 7035-I integrated terminal, this message is mandatory and appears even if this parameter is disabled (set to “N”).Dot Time – 7035 OnlyImportant: “Dot Time” appears in this menu only when “Long Range” is selected as the internal scanner option. Internal scanner options are described on page 101 under the heading “Int”.The value selected for “Dot Time” determines how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. This value is measure in 0.5 second intervals from 0 (zero) to 3.0 seconds.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 105Chapter 6: Setting ParametersBarcode6.6.3  BarcodeAll the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this menu. For each symbology, there are options in a sub-menu. The terminal automatically discriminates between the selected codes. Some restrictions may apply. Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to “Y”) only those codes that are required by the application.6.6.3.1 Code 39Full AsciiIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.Code 39 Y »Code 128 Y »EAN 13 Y »EAN 8 Y »UPC A Y »UPC E Y »Codabar N »Code 93 N »Code 11 N »I 2 of 5 N »MSI/PLESSY N »D 2 of 5 N »BarcodeFull Ascii NMod 43 Chk NMod 10 Chk NInclude Chk NAIAG Strip NErr Accept NSize/Chars »Code 39
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersCode 39106 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualMod 43 ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the Mod 43 check digit is calculated.Mod 10 ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.AIAG StripIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label. The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or some numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code.Err AcceptIf the “Err Accept” and “AIAG Strip” parameters are enabled (set to “Y”), all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted. If the “Err Accept” parameter is disabled (set to “N”) and the “AIAG Strip” parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the label data is not accepted.Size/CharsField SizeThe field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only bar codes of that length are passed through.Field Size 0 0-99Prefix Char 0 0-127Suffix Char 0 0-127Strip Leading 0 0-127Strip Trailing 0 0-127Size/Chars Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 107Chapter 6: Setting ParametersCode 128Prefix CharThis character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of “0” (zero) if no prefix is to be added.Suffix CharThis character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of “0” (zero) if no suffix is to be added.Strip LeadingThis parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.Notes: 1. The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <F1> is entered, the usual action for that function key is performed. With ANSI emulation, the terminal transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data.2. For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.Strip TrailingThe value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.6.6.3.2 Code 128StandardSet “Standard” to “Y” if Code 128 is desired.Standard YUCC 128 NEAN/UCC 128 N»Size/Chars »Code 128
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersEAN 13108 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualUCC 128UCC 128 is a variation of Code 128.EAN/UCC 128Set “EAN/UCC 128” to “Y” to enable this type of bar code. “EAN/UCC 128”bar codes include group separators and start codes. This type of bar code has a sub-menu attached to it – “Include Sym”.Enabling (setting to “Y”) “Include Sym” causes the group separator(s) and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the terminal screen.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” on page 106.6.6.3.3 EAN 13Inc CountryIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the country code is included with the decoded bar code data.Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsInclude Sym NInc Country YInclude Chk YSize/Chars »Addendum DisabledEAN 13Prefix Char 0 0-127Suffix Char 0 0-127Strip Leading 0 0-127Strip Trailing 0 0-127Size/Chars Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 109Chapter 6: Setting ParametersEAN 13Prefix CharThis character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of “0” (zero) if no prefix is to be added.Suffix CharThis character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of “0” (zero) if no suffix is to be added.Strip LeadingThis parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.Notes: 1. The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <F1> is entered, the usual action for that Function key is performed. With ANSI emulation, the terminal transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data.2. For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.Strip TrailingThe value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.AddendumImportant: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to “Y”.An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersEAN 8110 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.6.3.4 EAN 8Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 108.AddendumImportant: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to “Y”.An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.Include Chk YSize/Chars »Addendum DisableEAN 8
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 111Chapter 6: Setting ParametersUPC A6.6.3.5 UPC AInc Num SysIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 108.AddendumImportant: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to “Y”.An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.Inc Num Sys NInclude Chk NSize/Chars »Addendum DisabledUPC A
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersUPC E112 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.6.3.6 UPC EExp to UPC ASetting this parameter to “Y” enables a non-standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code.Inc Num SysIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Include ChkWhen enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 108.AddendumImportant: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to “Y”.An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.Exp to UPC A YInc Num Sys YInclude Chk YSize/Chars »Addendum DisableUPC E
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 113Chapter 6: Setting ParametersCodabar6.6.3.7 CodabarSize/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 106.6.6.3.8 Code 93Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 106.6.6.3.9 Code 111 Chk DigitIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.2 Chk DigitsIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), it is assumed that the last two digits arecheck digits.Include ChkIf “Include Chk” is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 106.Size/Chars »CodabarSize/Chars »Code 931 Chk Digit N2 Chk Digits YInclude Chk NSize/Chars »Code 11
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersI 2 of 5114 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.6.3.10 I 2 of 5Mod 10 ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.ITF ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated.Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 106.6.6.3.11 MSI/PLESSY1 Chk DigitIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 106.Mod 10 Chk NITF Chk NInclude Chk NSize/Chars »I 2 of 51 Chk Digit YInclude Chk NSize/Chars »MSI/PLESSY
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 115Chapter 6: Setting ParametersD 2 of 56.6.3.12 D 2 of 5Mod 10 ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.Include ChkIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.Size/CharsSee “Size/Chars” beginning on page 106.6.7  Applications“TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique names so that several different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously. The 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals can support up to 4 sessions at one time.Important: These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing <F4> – the SAVE key.Mod 10 Chk NInclude Chk NSize/Chars »D 2 of 5Name #1 Widget see textType #1 ANSI TESS/ANSISettings #1 » see text...Name #4Type #4Settings #4Applications Range
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersANSI Settings116 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualName And TypeUp to four applications can be entered in this parameter. The “Name #” parameter must be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator. The “Type #” field indicates the type of session you will be running.•In a “Name #” field, type a name that is meaningful to the operator.•The available options for the “Type #” field are TESS and ANSI. Type the appropriate application type in this field using either uppercase, lowercase or a combination.•To display the “Settings” menu for your application , position the cursor on “Settings”, and press <F1> – the NEXT key.Note: Before you can access the “Settings” menu, you must first complete the “Name” and “Type” fields.6.7.1  ANSI SettingsEach session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional ANSI information is documented in Chapter 5: ANSI Operations.Terminal #For every application session you create, the terminal number assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter must be non-zero and unique. This parameter defines the terminal number for the ANSI session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the terminal.Other applications running in the terminal, such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different terminal number. In addition, each Teklogix terminal using the radio link must have a unique terminal number.Terminal # 1 1-1024Host Conn » see textScreen » see textChar Set » see textVideo » see textTransmit » see textKeyboard » see textSerial » see textAnsi Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 117Chapter 6: Setting ParametersHost Conn6.7.1.1 Host ConnImportant: This parameter is not available when the terminal is operating with a narrow band radio.Conn TypeThis parameter allows the operator to choose one of the following types of connections: TCP Direct if the terminal is communicating through a controller or an SDK, or Telnet if the terminal is communicating directly to the host.HostThis parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###Port“Port” specifies the TCP Direct or Telnet port number. By default, the Telnet port is assigned port number 23. The TCP Direct port is assigned the value 9999.6.7.1.2 ScreenPagesThis parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs. The ANSI control functions, Next Page (NP) and Previous page (PP), are used to select another page. These pages are independent of each other, so that if lines of text scroll off a page, the other pages are unaffected.There is no error indication from the terminal if the memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the terminal.Conn Type Telnet TCP Direct/TelnetHost see textPort 23 0-9999RangeHost ConnPages 4 0-16Columns 80 80 or 132Rows 24 4-60Auto Wrap Y Y/NSoftkeys » see textRangeScreen
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScreen118 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualColumnsThis parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the terminal display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display.Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.RowsThis parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the terminal’s display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.Auto WrapIf “Auto Wrap” is disabled (set to “N”), characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters. If “Auto Wrap” is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled. The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin.SoftkeysNote: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about com-pleting this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 85.Important: The sample menu above reflects the 7035 hand-held softkey options. The Softkey menu in the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals provides six softkeys – <F1> to <F6>. F1F2F3F4Softkeys
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 119Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChar Set – North American And EuropeanSoftkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels, reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen. These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to this parameter.To edit a label:•Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Softkey menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes the corresponding key’s function.Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.6.7.1.3 Char Set – North American And EuropeanImportant: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, aright arrow character is used as a substitute.Note: For details on Chinese and Korean character sets, refer to “Char Set – Chinese And Korean” on page 121 for details.This menu contains all the character sets available with your Teklogix terminal.To choose a character set:•Position the cursor on the character set you want to use, and press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”.Once you’ve chosen and enabled (set to “Y”) a particular character set, you’ll need to choose from the sub-menu attached to that character set.•Press <F1> to display the character set options.•To enable a character set option, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”ISO N »IBM Y »DEC N »Char Set
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChar Set – North American And European120 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualISO OptionsIBM OptionsISO 8859-1 NISO 646 ASCII NISOEBCDIC N »Other Y »IBM5250 Multin’l NIBM 037 NIBM 256 NIBM 237 NIBM 871 NIBM 875 NBelgium NBrazil NBritish NDanish/Norway NFinnish/Swed. NFrench NFrench Cdn. NItalian NPortugal NSpain NSpanish NEBCDICIBM PC 437 NIBM PC 850 YOther
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 121Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChar Set – Chinese And KoreanDEC Options6.7.1.4 Char Set – Chinese And KoreanImportant: If you are using a Chinese character set and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the terminal screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute.If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is used as a substitute.Note: Refer to "Char Set – North American And European" beginning on page 119 for details about selecting character sets.Chinese Character SetsVT220 British NVT220 Danish NVT220 Finnish NVT220 French NVT220 Fr. Cdn. NVT220 German NVT220 Italian NVT330 Portugal NVT330 Spanish NVT220 Swedish NGraphical NMultinational NDECISO N »IBM Y »Misc N »Char SetISO 646 ASCIIISOChineseIBMBig 5Misc
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersVideo122 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualKorean Character Sets6.7.1.5 VideoBoldThe value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Bold” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).BlinkThe value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Blink” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).ReverseThe value assigned to the “Reverse” parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).UnderlineThe value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Underline” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).ISO N »IBM Y »Misc N »Char SetISO 646 ASCIIISOKoreanKorean IntIBM MiscFujitsu KoreanKSC 5601Bold NONE see textBlink BLNK see textReverse REV see textUnderline ULIN see textVideo Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 123Chapter 6: Setting ParametersTransmit6.7.1.6 TransmitXmit CountThis parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the terminal before being transmitted to the host. If 0 (zero) is selected, the terminal transmits only according to the “Xmit Wait” parameter. If the ANSI block mode features are used, this parameter should be set to 99.Note: If the terminal is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit Count” parameter setting.Xmit WaitThis parameter determines the length of time the terminal collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host. This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second (i.e., a value of 10 represents 1 second). If 0 (zero) is selected, the terminal transmits only according to the “Xmit Count” parameter.Note: If the terminal is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit Wait” parameter setting.Dev AttrThis parameter specifies a device attribute string. This string can be up to 39 characters long. The terminal sends this string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control. Whether or not this parameter is set is dependent on the requirements of the host computer.Xmit Count 0-99Xmit Wait 0-999Dev Attr see textAuto-Ans see textRangeTransmit
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersKeyboard124 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualAuto-AnsThis string can be up to 39 characters long and is sent by the terminal as a reply to an “ENQ” character from the host. The “Auto-Answer” string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros. For example, this string can be used to automatically send the user name and password when logging into the host. Refer to "String Entry Parameters" on page 85 to 86 for detailed information.6.7.1.7 KeyboardNewlineWhen this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), a LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column. In addition, the <ENTER> key transmits a CR. When enabled (set to “Y”), an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line. The <ENTER> key transmits both a CR and an LF.Echo ModeThe available echo modes are:Smart: This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer. The terminal displays all printable characters on the screen before sending them to the host. The terminal compares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and alters the display if the host echoes are different.The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25. Any addi-tional characters are sent to the host but are not displayed. When the terminal is in insert mode, smart echo is disabled.Important: To suspend Smart echo mode if, for example, you are entering a password, press <ALT> and type ‘.’ (period). Characters will be replaced with a series of periods until you press the <ENTER> key.Newline N Y/NEcho Mode Smart Smart, Local, HostDEL Key BS BS, DELKeyboard Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 125Chapter 6: Setting ParametersKeyboardLocal: In this mode, any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host. Certain keys cause additional action at the terminal, as shown in Table 6.2 on page 125.Host: In this mode, the terminal sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host.Table 6.2  Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo ModeDEL KeyThis parameter determines which character is sent to the host – DEL (delete) or BS (backspace). The host interprets how it will respond to the code. The selection made at this parameter does not affect how the <DEL> key operates at the terminal.Key FunctionENTER In Newline mode, this key moves the cursor to the first column of the next line. In line feed mode, this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line.CTRL-G (Bell) The terminal beeps.CTRL-H (Backspace) The cursor moves back one space.CTRL-I (Tab) The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop.CTRL-J (Line Feed)CTRL-L (Form Feed) The cursor moves down one line in the same column.CTRL-K (Vertical Tab) The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set.DEL This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves the cursor to the left by one position.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSerial126 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.7.2  SerialAsync InWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the serial (async) port is ready to receive input at all times.Start/EndThe start character is added to the beginning of the data received from the serial (asynch) port. The end character is added to the end of the data received.6.7.3  TESS SettingsEach session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional ANSI information is documented in Chapter 4: TESS Operations.Terminal #For every application session you create, the terminal number assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter must be non-zero and unique. This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the terminal.Other applications running in the terminal, such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different terminal number. In addition, each Teklogix terminal using the radio link must have a unique terminal number.Async In N Y/NStart 0 0-255End 0 0-255Serial RangeTerminal # 1 see textHost Conn » see textScreen » see textCharacters » see textSerial » see textTests » see textScanner » see textFields » see textFeatures » see textTESS Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 127Chapter 6: Setting ParametersHost Conn6.7.3.1 Host ConnImportant: This parameter is not available when the terminal is operating with a narrow band radio.HostThis parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###Port“Port” specifies the TCP Direct port number. By default, the TCP Direct port is assigned the value 9999.6.7.3.2 ScreenColumnsThis parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the terminal display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display.Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.Host see textPort 23 0-9999RangeHost ConnColumns 80 20..132Rows 24 4..100Origin Scroll N Y/NField Scroll N Y/NPages Saved 16 1..16App. Parameter -1 -1..79Softkeys » see textRangeScreen
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScreen128 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualRowsThis parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the terminal’s display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number.Origin ScrollWhen enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the origin (upper-left corner) after “LOCK-H” or “LOCK-B” messages.Field ScrollWhen enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry field.Pages SavedThis parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the terminal. Storing frequently used page data at the terminal reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link. Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time. Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions.App. ParameterThe “Application” parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command. Enter zero if this parameter is not used.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 129Chapter 6: Setting ParametersCharactersSoftkeysNote: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about com-pleting this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 85.Important: The sample menu above reflects the 7035 hand-held softkey options. The Softkey menu in the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals provides six softkeys – <F1> to <F6>. Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels, reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen. These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to this parameter.To edit a label:•Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Softkey menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes the corresponding key’s function.Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.6.7.3.3 CharactersF1F2F3F4SoftkeysInvis. 42 0-255NULL 46 0-255Char Set » see textErr Func Key 0 0-255V Match Char 0 0-255H Match Char 0 0-255Upper Case N Y/NRangeCharacters
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChar Set130 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualInvisIn TESS applications, some fields may be set as “invisible” or “non-display” fields. This parameter determines the character that will mask the actual text typed. For example, this feature is often used in password entry fields where the actual text typed is replaced by asterisks.* (asterisk) The ASCII equivalent for this character is 42.NULLThis parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields. (Note that positions containing spaces are not considered empty.) Enter the ASCII equivalent of this character. The most commonly used characters are:_ (underline) The ASCII equivalent for this character is 95.. (period) The ASCII equivalent for this character is 46.6.7.3.4 Char SetThis menu contains all the character sets available within TESS:•Position the cursor on the character set you want to use, and press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”.•Once you’ve enabled (set to “Y”) a particular character set, you’ll need to choose from the sub-menu attached to that character set.•Press <F1> to display the character set options.•To enable a character set option, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”ISO OptionsISO N »IBM Y »DEC N »CharISO 8859-1 NISO 646 ASCII NISO
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 131Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChar SetIBM OptionsDEC OptionsEBCDIC N »Other Y »IBM5250 Multin’l NIBM 037 NIBM 256 NIBM 237 NIBM 871 NIBM 875 NBelgium NBrazil NBritish NDanish/Norway NFinnish/Swed. NFrench NFrench Cdn. NItalian NPortugal NSpain NSpanish NEBCDICIBM PC 437 NIBM PC 850 YOtherVT220 British NVT220 Danish NVT220 Finnish NVT220 French NVT220 Fr. Cdn. NVT220 German NVT220 Italian NVT330 Portugal NVT330 Spanish NVT220 Swedish NGraphical NMultinational NDEC
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChar Set132 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualErr Func keyThis parameter defines the function key that interrupts the normal sequence of a terminal and causes an Error Reply message to be returned to the host. Enter the number of the function key to be used as the Error function key (e.g., “1” for function key 1).This parameter should be set to zero unless there is a system requirement for Error Reply messages. When the Error function key is entered, the terminal abandons all queued procedures and TESS commands and returns an Error Reply message, with a milestone, to the host. The host must respond with a milestone acknowledge before the terminal accepts further TESS commands.V Match ChrThis parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The terminal beeps if the entered data does not match. Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field.Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify visible match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream.H Match ChrThis parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The terminal beeps if the entered data does not match. Hidden field matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry field.Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify hidden match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream.Upper CaseWhen this parameter is set to “Y”, lowercase input is converted to uppercase.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 133Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSerial6.7.3.5 SerialNote: This menu uses “string entry” parameters. For detailed information about entering data in this type of parameter, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 85.InThis parameter enables the serial port input fields. If enabled (set to “Y”), the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port. Data entered in these fields must begin with a line feed and end with a carriage return.PrefixThis parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial input. A value of “0” (zero) indicates no prefix. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the start character.SuffixThis parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial input. A value of “0” (zero) indicates no suffix. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the end character.OutThis parameter enables serial port output fields.PrefixThis parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial output. A value of “0” (zero) indicates no prefix. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the start character.In N Y/NPrefix 10 0-255Suffix 13 0-255Out Y Y/NPrefix 10 0-255Suffix 13 0-255Serial Range
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersTests134 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualSuffixThis parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial output. A value of “0” (zero) indicates no suffix. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the end character.6.7.3.6 TestsAutoRep FnThis parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode. The value represents the number of the function key – not the ASCII decimal equivalent. After sending this key, the terminal locks and waits for the host to unlock the terminal. To disable “AutoRep Fn”, set the “AutoRep T/O” parameter to zero.AutoRep T/OThis parameter determines the time (in seconds) between the terminal unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the “AutoRep Fn” parameter. A value of zero disables auto reply mode.6.7.3.7 ScannerContNxtFieldThis parameter only applies to string entry data. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the next field. If “ContNxtField” is disabled (set to “N”) OFF data will flow into the next field. AutoRep Fn 11-36AutoRep T/O 0 0-255RangeTestsContNxtField YY/NAppend Enter Y Y/NAppend F0 Y Y/NMixed AIAG N Y/NRjct if Alpha N Y/NBeam Lockout N Y/NRangeScanner
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 135Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScannerAppend EnterWhen enabled (set to “Y”), “Append Enter” causes an <ENTER> code to be appended to the bar code. The <ENTER> code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field.Append F0When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes an <F0> code to be appended to the bar code. The <F0> code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field.Mixed AIAGWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), AIAG labels are always accepted and processed – even if mixed with keyboard input. The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data. If this parameter is disabled, AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress.Rjct if AlphaWhen the cursor is in a numeric field and “Rjct if Alpha” is enabled (set to “Y”), bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected.Beam LockoutWhen enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in “LOCK-H” mode.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersFields136 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.7.3.8 FieldsField OrderThis parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields. The next field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers. When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor moves according to field location. If disabled (set to “N”), the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields.Enter To F0The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a transmission from the terminal. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the <ENTER> key to be interpreted as <F0> which starts a transmission.Enter On ArrWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field.Entry Mode“Entry Mode” parameters allow you to select a data entry mode. The modes are: insert, replace, field and fcursor. “TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement” on page 65 describes these modes in detail.Open Fky OnlyWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the screen is open for function keys only, and the cursor is not positioned. When this parameter is disabled, the screen is open for data entry, and the cursor is placed in the first field (if it exists).Field Order YY/NEnter To F0 Y Y/NEnter On Arr Y Y/NEntry Mode field see textOpen Fky Only N Y/NVideo » see textAll Fld Video Y Y/NIgn Bcode_fld N Y/NEnh Edit Mode N Y/NRangeFields
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 137Chapter 6: Setting ParametersFieldsVideoBoldThe value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Bold” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).BlinkThe value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Blink” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).ReverseThe value assigned to the “Reverse” parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” ANSI attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).All Fld VideoUsually, the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the entire field (including blanks) takes on the video attributes. Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with reverse video.Ign Bcode_fldWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), fields that were defined as “bar code only” accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader. In effect, they behave as data entry fields.Bold NONE see textBlink BLNK see textReverse REV see textVideo Range
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersFeatures138 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualEnh Edit ModeThis mode provides extended (enhanced) functionality to users of Teklogix’ IBM 5250 terminal emulation. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen, unrestricted by fixed or entry fields. Table 6.3 describes the cursor movement when an arrow key is pressed in conjunction with the <SHIFT> key.Table 6.3  Enhanced Edit Mode Cursor Key Operation6.7.4  FeaturesKbd LockedThis parameter allows you to lock (set to “Y”) or unlock (set to “N”) the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS. When the keyboard is locked, the Function keys, arrow keys and the <ENTER> key are still functional. The terminal emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked. Changes to this parameter take effect only after the terminal is reset.Key Function Key Sequence Cursor MovementField Advance or Tab <SHIFT> <RIGHT> arrow keyCursor moves to the first position in the next input field. If already in the last field, the cursor moves to the first input field on the screen.Field Backspace <SHIFT> <LEFT> arrow keyCursor moves to the beginning of the current field. If already in the first position, the cursor moves to beginning of the previous field.Field Exit <SHIFT> <DOWN> arrow keyCurrent field is cleared, and the cursor moves to the next input field.Home <SHIFT> <UP>arrow keyCursor moves to the first input field on the screen.Kbd Locked N Y/NFeatures Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 139Chapter 6: Setting ParametersView Manager6.8  View ManagerAnchor ViewWhen enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “X-origin” and “Y-origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper-left corner of the screen, will be fixed.X-origin And Y-originThe “X-origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored. The “Y-origin” parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.Use incrementWhen “Use increment” is enabled (set to “Y”) and the cursor is moved off the display, the screen contents shift by the values specified in the “X-increment” and “Y-increment” parameters.X-incrementThis parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use Increment” is set to “Y”.Y-incrementThis parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use Increment” is set to “Y”.Anchor View NY/NX-origin 1 1-80Y-origin 1 1-24Use Increment N Y/NX-increment 5 1-40Y-increment 5 1-12Display Shift Y Y/NCustom Chars » see textRangeView Manager
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersView Manager140 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualDisplay ShiftIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left-most side of the display.Custom CharsThis parameter is used to create a list of characters (to a maximum of 20 characters) that are not normally available directly from the keyboard.To create a character:•Type the decimal equivalent of the character you want to create. You can look up the decimal value in the code page you selected using the "Code Page" parameter (see page 95).Note: If the character you select does not exist in the host character set, it cannot be sent to the host application.Once you’ve created this list of characters, you can access the list from within a TESS or ANSI session as follows:•Press <ALT> a to display your list of custom characters.•Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to highlight the character you require, and press <ENTER> to select it.Char nn 0-255•••Char nn 0-255RangeCustom Chars
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 141Chapter 6: Setting ParametersPorts– Serial 1 And Console 26.9  Ports– Serial 1 And Console 26.9.1  Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral OptionsThe “Serial 1” (COM1) and “Console 2” (COM2) options allow you to enable, disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports. For the “Serial 1” port, the possible values are: Disable Enable Print Scanner and Output. For the “Console 2” port, the possible values for this parameter are: Disable Enable Print Scanner and Scan-See and Nomad.To scroll through the options for each port:•Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key.Important: If you choose Disable, the corresponding port parameters will not take effect.These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected.•“Print” – all TESS print operations are directed to the port. All ANSI media copy operations to the “primary port” are directed to this port.•“Scanner” – TESS and ANSI accept scanner input from the port.•“Scan-See” – TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan-See through the Console 2 port. (This option is not available for the Serial 1 port.)•“Nomad” – TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Nomad scanner through the Console 2 port. (This option is not available for the Serial 1 port.)•“Output” – the TESS pass-through operations and serial output fields are directed to the Serial 1 port. (This option is not available for the Console 2 port.)Serial 1 PrintParameters »Console 2 DisableParameters »Ports
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSerial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings142 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual6.9.2  Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter SettingsSince the parameters for the “Serial 1” and “Console 2” ports are identical in most cases, they are discussed in one section. Any differences are clearly indicated.Important: The most significant difference between the “Serial 1” and “Con-sole 2” port parameters is that the ScanSee menu is only available in the Console 2 “Parameters” menu.SpeedThis parameter determines the bit rate of the port. Data BitsThis parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.ParityThis parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port. The options are Odd, Even and None.Stop BitsThis parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1 or 2 – used for asynchronous communication.Speed 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600Data Bits 8 7-8Parity None None Odd EvenStop Bits 1 1-2Flow Control None None CTS/RTS XON/XOFFBuffer 512 32-2048Retries 3 1-100Input Tmo 2 0-100Test Y Y/NScanSee » see textConsole 2 Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 143Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSerial 1 And Console 2 Parameter SettingsFlow ControlImportant: Flow Control is not available for Console 2.This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your terminal. The 7035 can perform XON/XOFF and/or CTS/RTS handshaking. Note that RTS/CTS hardware flow control generally results in faster data throughput.The function of each mode is as follows:Enable: Used to input and output data.Supports XON/XOFF and/or CTS/RTS or no handshakingPrint: Used to output data only. All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored.Supports XON/XOFF and/or CTS/RTS or no handshaking.Output: Used to output data only. All input characters are ignored.Supports CTS/RTS or no handshakingNote: To enable the input and/or output, ‘serial in’ and/or ‘serial out’ must be enabled in the TESS menu.BufferThe value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output. The buffer controls how much data the application can send to or receive from a serial device.RetriesNote: “Retries” is not available if “Nomad” is chosen as the peripheral device.This parameter determines the number of times the terminal attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port. If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded, the transmission fails.Input TmoThis parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the terminal waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSetting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad144 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualTestWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data is output through the serial port to make certain that it is operating appropriately.6.9.3  Setting The Terminal Console Port For NomadTo interface the terminal to the Nomad scanner, “Console 2” must be configured for Nomad. For detailed information about configuring the Nomad scanner, refer to the “LS3070™ Wireless Scanner User Manual” – P.N. 80416.A 6.9.4  Setting The Terminal Console Port For Scan-SeeWarning: ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE SCAN-SEE FROM THE TERMINAL BEFORE A TERMINAL RESET! Resetting the terminal with the Scan-See connected to it may cause it to “hang” and boot up improperly.In order for the terminal to interface to the Scan-See, the console port should be set as follows:Speed = 9600 baud# of bits = 7Parity = none2stop bits = YTest = NNote: In order for the terminal to interface to Scan-See units with older firmware (serial numbers lower than 1594120224), set “Parity=space”; all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware.6.9.4.1 Scan-See ParametersNote: Scan-Sees equipped with an LED screen have 10 column displays. The newer Scan-Sees with LCDs have 20 column displays.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 145Chapter 6: Setting ParametersModel 7000 Settings – Defaults & Allowable Ranges6.9.4.2 Model 7000 Settings – Defaults & Allowable Ranges6.9.4.3 Model 7000M Settings – Defaults & Allowable Ranges6.9.4.4 Scan-See Display – Mapping The "Viewport"The Scan-See display is mapped to a specific area on the terminal screen called the “Scan-See viewport” and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen. The Scan-See viewport is defined as follows: Anchor Line 1 0...1Anchor Column 9 0...19Follow Cursor Y Y/NLine Offset 0 -25...25Column Offset -1 -80...80Wraparound N Y/NPanning Y Y/NLine Scrolling N Y/NBrightness 3 0 to 5Arrows Bright Bright Horz VertVersion 0 or 10...3 (see pg 149 for details)XON/XOFF Y Y/N04 Scan-See 30106-001Default SettingModel 7000 RangeAnchor Line 1 0...1Anchor Column 19 0...19Follow Cursor Y Y/NLine Offset 0 -25...25Column Offset -1 -80...80Wraparound N Y/NPanning Y Y/N Line Scrolling N Y/NBrightness n/a 0 to 5Arrows Vert Bright Horz VertVersion 2 or 30...3 (see pg 149 for details)XON/XOFF Y Y/N04 Scan-See30107-001Default SettingModel 7000M Range
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScan-See Display – Mapping The "Viewport"146 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualAnchor Line/Anchor ColumnA location on the Scan-See display – the anchor – is chosen as a reference point. Important: The range for this parameter varies depending on the type of Scan-See you are using.If you are using a Scan-See with a 10 column LED , the range for this parameter is 0 to 9. If you are using a Scan-See equipped with a 20 column LCD, the range for this parameter is 0 to 19.Line Offset/Column OffsetA predefined displacement – the offset – is added to the location of the terminal cursor to give us a point – the pivot. This pivot is mapped to the anchor , and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan-See. For example:•The anchor is chosen as (9,0) where “9” is the column and “0” is the line (on the Scan-See display).•The offset is chosen as (4,2).•The cursor on the terminal is currently located at (7,5).•The pivot would thus be located at (7+4, 5+2) or (11,7).•The area displayed on the Scan-See will be: (11–9,7–0) to (11–9+9,7–0+1) or (2,7) to (11,8).1 1These computations assume “Wraparound” (see page 148) is disabled, and“Follow Cursor” is enabled.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 147Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScan-See Display – Mapping The "Viewport"Figure 6.1 Scan-See ViewportNote: To enter negative values, press the “-” (minus) key, and then the number you want to use. The <LEFT> arrow key can also be used to decrement the value in the parameter. Each time the <LEFT> arrow is pressed, the number is decremented by one. For example, to enter a value of “–5”, start from zero, and press the <LEFT> arrow five times.(9,0)anchorScan-See Display Terminal Displaysuperimposingthe anchor on the pivotanchorpivot(11,8)(11,7)Scan-See Viewport(2,7)(11,7)offset+4+2(4,2)offset+4+2terminalcursorpivot =  +  offset(7,5)terminal cursor(0,0)0123456789101112131415161718192021 . . .(0,0)01234567891011. . .0123456789101112131415161718192021 . . .01234567891011. . .012345678901(0,0)
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScan-See Display – Mapping The "Viewport"148 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualFollow CursorWhen the “Follow Cursor” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), it is always assumed that the cursor is located at the origin.Using the previous example:•the area displayed will be (4–9,2–0) to (4–9+9, 2–0+1), or, after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80: (0,2) to (4,3).WraparoundWhen “Wraparound” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as a 1 line by 20 column display rather than a 2 line by 10 column display. Keep in mind that new Scan-Sees equipped with LCDs have 20 column displays.PanningIf “Panning” is disabled (set to “N”), when the cursor moves one position to the right and the pivot is still inside the Scan-See display, the Scan-See viewport does not move. The Scan-See display is updated to reflect the changes within that viewport. If the pivot goes outside the viewport, or if the terminal display changes without the cursor being moved, the viewport is re-synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor.Line ScrollingWhen “Line Scrolling” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as two separate 1 line by 10 column displays. The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line, so in an application where the cursor skips from one entry field to another, the field that was just entered is shown on the top line, and the field to be entered is shown at the bottom. Note: When this feature is enabled (set to “Y”), the “Panning” option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke BrightnessThe “Brightness” parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display. It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan-Sees – scanners equipped with LED (light emitting diode) displays.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 149Chapter 6: Setting ParametersScan-See Display – Mapping The "Viewport"ArrowsThe “Arrows” parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan-See keyboard:Table 6.4  Functions Of The Arrows ParameterNote: For “Horiz” and “Vert,” changing the offset takes effect only after the terminal display has been updated.VersionScan-See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the terminal than older units. The “Version” numbers represent the following unit versions:Table 6.5  Scan-See VersionsNote: To interface the terminal to the Scan-See units with older firmware (serial number lower than 1594120224), set “Parity = space”; all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware.Refer to the Scan-See User Manual (P.N. 80408.C) for more information about installing and using the Scan-See.Value Function“Bright”Arrow keys control Scan-See display brightness“Horiz”Arrow keys control “Column Offset”“Vert”Arrow keys control “Line Offset”Value Scan-See Version0First LED version – up to serial number 1594080275. These are encased in grey plastic.1Corresponds to Model 7000 LED units – versions after the serial number above. These are also encased in grey plastic.2Corresponds to the Metrologic 7000M LCD units. These are encased in grey plastic.3Corresponds to the current 7000M LCD units all of which are encased in black plastic.
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersGlobal Macros150 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualXON/XOFFImportant: IF YOU ARE USING TRANSCEIVERS WITH YOUR SCAN-SEE, this parameter must be set to “Y”.When set to “Y”, the XON and XOFF characters are not passed to the TESS or ANSI tasks. A received XOFF character stops the serial port from transmitting. A received XON character starts the serial port transmissions again.6.10  Global MacrosA macro has 19 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like <ENTER>, <DEL>, function keys and arrow keys. They may also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard.The methods used to create macros are described in this section.6.10.1  Displaying The Global Macros MenuMacros are programmed from within the “Global Macros” menu. If the Tekterm application is currently active:•8255/8260: – Press <ALT> and type x to exit the Tekterm application.•7035: Press <ORANGE> <ALT> before typing x.The “Display Menu” appears on the terminal screen.To display the “Parameters” menu:•8255/8260: –Type the letter a.•7035: Press <ORANGE> before typing a.A ParametersB EmulationsC DOS Prompt01 Display Menu
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 151Chapter 6: Setting ParametersDisplaying The Global Macros Table•Type your password in the Password window, and press <ENTER>.6.10.2  Displaying The Global Macros TableTo display the “Global Macros” table:•From the “Parameters” menu, position the cursor on the “Global Macros” option, and press <F1> to display the macro table.Note: This is a sample 7035 macro table. Vehicle-mount terminals displays 12 macro fields rather than 4.•Position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key to which you want to assign macros – #1 corresponds to macro key <M1>, #2 corresponds to macro key <M2>, and so on.Once the cursor is in a macro field, you have a number of options when creating a macro. You can type text and numbers, choose from a set of ASCII characters and program the function of special keys into a macro.System »Scanner »Applications »View Manager »Ports »Global Macros »Network »Radio »Sound »Parameters#1#2#3#4Global Macros
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersChoosing An ASCII Character152 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualIn macros, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and <DEL> keys have the following functions:•Pressing the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields.•Pressing the <ENTER> key once moves the cursor to the first position in the entry field; pressing <ENTER> a second time completes the entry field, exits the sub-menu and returns the cursor to the “parent” or previous menu.•The <DEL> key deletes the character to the left of the cursor.•The <CLR> key – <BLUE> <DEL> – clears the entire field. If the last character in a field is deleted, the previous contents, if any, reappear.6.10.3  Choosing An ASCII CharacterImportant: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off! By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters not available on the keyboard. The sample below is a set of ASCII characters not accessible from the keyboard.7035: / < > % ^ & ` ~ | [ ] { } " ' ? = + ;8255/8260: ^ & ‘ ~ | [ ] { } ’ " •Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one.6.10.4  Adding Additional ASCII CharactersWhen you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right.To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve already chosen:•Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.•Next, press the <DEL> keyThe cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.•Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 153Chapter 6: Setting ParametersProgramming Special Keys Into Macros6.10.5  Programming Special Keys Into MacrosMacros can contain the function of a subset of terminal keys. The keys that can be programmed into macros include: <ENTER>, <DEL> and <CLR> (<BLUE>-<DEL>), function keys and arrow keys. To program the function of a key:•With the cursor in the “Global Macros” table, use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key you want to program – the field labelled #1 represents <M1>, and so on. •Press <CTRL> and then, type the letter l (el) (l represents “literal”).•Press the key you wish to add to the macro.For example: To execute the function of the <ENTER> key in a macro,type <CTRL> l <ENTER>.6.11  NetworkNote: This menu is not displayed when a Mobitex TRX7460 radio is installed in the terminal.Local IPThis parameter is used to assign a unique terminal IP address so that the terminal can be identified on the network. The format is ###.###.###.###Net MaskA subnet mask is assigned at this parameter. The 7035 uses the subnet mask, it’s own IP address and the destination IP address to determine if a packet should be sent on the local network or a remote subnet. If the destination is found to reside on the local network, the packet is sent directly to its destination. If the destination resides on a remote subnet, the packet is routed to the appropriate gateway. The accepted values for “Net Mask” range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.Local IP see textNet Mask see textDefault Gateway see textEmploy bootp N Y/NNetwork Range
Chapter 6: Setting ParametersRadio154 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualDefault GatewayThe “Default Gateway” IP address assigned at this parameter creates an identifiable communication link between the terminal and a remote sub-network – that is, a network other than the one in which the terminal is currently operating. The acceptable values for this parameter range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.Note: Setting the “Default Gateway” to 0.0.0.0 disables this feature. A communication link will not exist between sub-networks.Employ BootpWhen this parameter is set to “Y”, a request for an IP address is automatically directed to the “BOOTP Server”. If after 5 attempts, an IP address is not transmitted, the terminal uses the IP address assigned in the “Local IP” parameter.6.12  RadioRefer to Appendix D: Radio Parameters for a detailed description of the parameters used to adjust radio communications.6.13  SoundBeep Tone And Beep TimeThese parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or ANSI session when one of the following is received at the terminal: an advisory, a hey you or a bell character. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.Beep tone 2300 500-5000Beep time 600 0-2000Error tone 800 500-5000Error time 600 0-2000Scan tone 1 1250 500-5000Scan time 1 150 0-2000Scan tone 2 2300 500-5000Scan time 2 150 0-2000Scan tone 3 3750 500-5000Scan time 3 150 0-2000Sound Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 155Chapter 6: Setting ParametersSoundError Tone And Error TimeThese parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.Scan Tone 1 And Scan Time 1“Scan tone 1” and “Scan time 1” determine the frequency and duration of the first beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2“Scan tone 2” and “Scan time 2” determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3“Scan tone 3” and “Scan time 3” determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 157TERMINAL ACCESSORIES 777.1  External Bar Code Readers..........................1597.1.1  Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader ................1597.2  The 7035 Battery ...............................1607.2.1  Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions ................1617.2.2  Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Specifications ...............1627.3  The 7942 In-Unit Charger ..........................1637.3.1  Mounting Bracket ...........................1647.3.2  Connecting The Power Source.....................1647.3.3  In-Unit Charger LED Indicators ....................1647.3.4  Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger ...........1657.3.5  Charging The Battery .........................1657.3.6  Battery Charge Fault Conditions....................1657.3.7  Charger Fault Conditions .......................1667.3.8  Removing The Terminal From The In-Unit Charger .........1667.3.9  7942 Charger Specifications ......................1667.4  The 7967 Gang Charger ...........................1677.4.1  Connecting The Power Source.....................1677.4.2  Inserting And Charging The Battery..................1677.4.3  Fault Conditions ............................1687.4.3.1  Fault LED Turns On During A Charge .............1687.4.3.2  Fault LED Turns On At Insertion ................1687.4.4  7967 Charger Specifications ......................1697.5  Important Charger Safety Instructions ....................1697.6  Antenna Types ................................1707.7  The 7035 Picker Cradle............................1717.7.1  Mounting Hardware ..........................1717.7.2  Installation ...............................171
Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories158 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7.7.3  Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting..............1727.7.4  Mounting The Cradle..........................1737.7.5  Installing The Cables ..........................1737.7.6  Connecting A Cable ..........................1737.7.7  Connecting The Power Source .....................1747.7.8  Attaching A Port Replicator ......................1747.7.9  Picker Cradle Maintenance .......................1747.7.10  Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal .............1757.7.11  Picker Cradle LED Indicator .....................1767.7.12  Specifications .............................1777.7.12.1  Physical ............................1777.7.12.2  Environmental ........................1777.7.12.3  Battery Pack .........................1777.7.12.4  Agency Approvals ......................1787.8  Accessories Part Number List.........................179
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 159Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesExternal Bar Code Readers7.1  External Bar Code ReadersWarning: ALWAYS TURN THE TERMINAL OFF before connecting or disconnecting any bar code reader.To connect a bar code reader (either a scanner or a contact wand) to the terminal, attach the device to the 28-pin peripheral port at the bottom of the unit.Before using the bar code reader, you may need to change some parameters. For details, review “Barcode” on page 105.7.1.1  Entering Data With A Bar Code ReaderThe terminal supports two types of bar code readers: contact wands or scanners. To use a scanner, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Use the wand as follows:•Hold the wand at less than 30° from the vertical.•If there is a switch on the wand, turn it on before starting the scan.•Keep the tip in contact with the entire label.•Move the wand across the label at a steady rate.•Begin the scan on an area of the label with a light background, and move the wand as if drawing a straight line across the label.Figure 7.1 Using A Wand Bar Code ReaderIf the label is scanned successfully, the scanned data appears on the display. The terminal will also beep if configured appropriately.Occasionally, the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read with the wand. In this case, use the keyboard to enter data from the label.0  00 75328  43815 0Centre Lineof WandVerticalCentreBar CodeSurface30Centre Lineof WandCentre Lineof Wand30
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesThe 7035 Battery160 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7.2  The 7035 BatteryWarning: When a battery is removed from the terminal, a backup of the system, application and any work in progress is maintained forup to 10 minutes. A fresh battery must be installed within this 10 minute time frame. THIS BACKUP WILL NOT FUNCTION UNLESS THE TERMINAL IS TURNED OFF BEFORE THE BATTERY IS REMOVED. Removing the battery while the unit is operating will result in a full reboot.Even after the system backup has expired, the date and time are maintained for at least 72 hours without a battery.7035 Lithium-Ion batteries operate for a minimum of eight hours1 after a charge. These batteries do not require conditioning. Each battery pack tracks its own capacity using an onscreen horizontal bar graph, referred to as the “battery gauge”. The battery gauge displays the percentage of remaining battery power capacity – 0 to 100%, resolution 10% of nominal capacity. The operator is notified when the battery capacity is low.Typical battery life is 750 cycles or 3 years average use. A fast charge is completed in 2.5 hours. The 7035 terminal will notify the user when the battery performance has degraded to the point that it should be discarded.1Times are approximate and may vary depending on operating conditions.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 161Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesLithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions7.2.1  Lithium-Ion Battery Safety PrecautionsImportant: It is critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all warnings be strictly followed.Warning: BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Teklogix for proper disposal. All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following Teklogix offices:Teklogix Inc. Teklogix Corp.2100 Meadowvale Blvd. 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd.Mississauga, Ontario Suite 500Canada Erlanger, KentuckyL5N 7J9 USA 41018Teklogix S.A.Parc Club Du Golf-Bat 1.13856 Aix-En-ProvenceCedex 3; FranceWarning: TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid, generating heat or exploding, adhere to precautions listed below.•The battery incorporates built-in safety devices. To ensure their proper function, do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery.•Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed terminals with metal objects such as wire. Do not transport or store the battery together with metal objects such as necklaces, hair pins, etc.•Do not dispose of batteries in fire.•Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire or heater.•Do not immerse the battery in water.•When charging, use the battery charger specifically designed for the battery.•Do not pierce, strike, throw or step on the battery.•Do not directly solder the battery.•Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet, vehicle cigarette lighter, etc.•Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.•Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries (such as dry-cell batteries) or batteries of different capacities or brands.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesLithium-Ion Battery Pack Specifications162 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual•Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger and stop use if the battery gives off an odor, generates heat, becomes discoloured or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal during use.•Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the specified charge time.•The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks. Always ensure that it is away from any exposed flames. •If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes, rinse them with clean running water, and immediately seek medical attention.•Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures (e.g., a vehicle, strong direct sunlight, etc.). This may cause the battery to overheat or ignite, and it may also reduce the performance and service life of the battery.•Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the manufacturer guarantees.•Keep batteries out of reach of children.7.2.2  Lithium-Ion Battery Pack SpecificationsBattery PackTechnology Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)Supported packs P.N. 20605P.N. 20605-001P.N. 20605-002Battery pack P.N. 20605Charge temperature 0˚ C to 45˚ C (32˚ F to 113˚ F).Discharge temperature  -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Battery pack P.N. 20605-001Charge temperature 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113˚ F).Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Battery pack P.N. 20605-002Charge temperature 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113 ˚ F).Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Life span Pack performance does not degrade below 70% of nominal under typical daily use over 2 years. (Based on 3 charge/discharge cycles every 2 days and 250 working days/year.)
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 163Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesThe 7942 In-Unit ChargerCharge Cycles Minimum of 750 charge cycles.Charge Time Fast charge typically in 2.5 hours.Performance Monitor Identifies the need for pack replacement.Voltage 7.2 V nominal (6.0 V to 8.4 V maximum)Capacity 1350 mAh at 7.2 V nominalWeight 115 g nominalBattery Life 8 hours minimum at 23˚ C (73.4˚ F) with back-light on 5%, 5 scan transactions per minute, TESS emulation, TRX7370 radio. Based on typical 1 year cell degradation.Supported Chargers Model #7967 – 6-gang custom chargerModel #7942 – In-unit chargerMemory No memory effect.Battery Gauge Indicates remaining capacity, 0 to 100%, resolution 10%. Nominal capacity of battery pack is displayed as a reference.Graceful Power Fail Operator is notified when battery capacity is low.7.3  The 7942 In-Unit ChargerImportant: The 7035 cannot be switched on while it is inserted in the 7942 in-unit charger. In fact, if the terminal is “on” when it is inserted in the charger, it is automatically switched off.The 7942 In-Unit Charger is a single site, fast charger. This unit can charge Lithium-Ion or Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries. Note: To ensure that air flow through the base of the charger is unimpeded, the charger should be placed on a hard, flat surface, free of possible obstructions.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesMounting Bracket164 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7.3.1  Mounting BracketThe optional mounting bracket allows the 7942 charger to be permanently secured to a table or bench, permitting “one-handed” removal of the 7035 terminal from the unit. Charging temperature is restricted to from 10° to 30° C (50° to 86° F).To attach the mounting bracket:•Remove the two rubber feet closest to the front of the charger. Retain the screws.•Secure the mounting bracket to the charger using the screws removed from the rubber feet.•Use two #8 wood screws to secure the bracket to the appropriate surface7.3.2  Connecting The Power Source•Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC connector at the back of the charger.•Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source.When the charger is plugged in, all the LEDs turn on for a few seconds during a self-test. The “Power” LED then remains on, indicating a power connection.7.3.3  In-Unit Charger LED IndicatorsTable 7.1  Charger LEDsLED Indicator DefinitionPower – Green  •Always on when the charger is plugged in.Charge – Yellow •On during charge process.•Off once battery is fully charged.Fault – Red•Blinking if a battery charge fails. •On solid when battery is rejected.(See “Battery Charge Fault Conditions” on page 165 and “Charger Fault Conditions” on page 166 for details.)Ready – Green •On when charge is completed successfully.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 165Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesInserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger7.3.4  Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The ChargerThe 7942 Charger has a “Power” LED along with three additional LEDs – Ready, Charge and Fault. Ensure that the green “Power” LED at the front of the charger is “on”. The in-unit battery charge pocket is moulded, making it easy to slide the terminal into the charger well.•Grasp the terminal just below the display with the keyboard facing you, and slide the lower portion of the terminal with battery into the charger.•Apply steady, gentle downward pressure to properly mate the charger connector with the battery in the terminal.7.3.5  Charging The BatteryWhen the terminal with battery is inserted in the charger, all LEDs light up. After a few seconds, the “Ready” and “Fault” LEDs turn off. The “Charge” LED remains on, indicating the fast charge is in progress. The “Power” LED should always be on.Note: If the 7035 is powered up when it is inserted in the charger, it will be turned off automatically.Battery Charged And ReadyTypically, a fast charge takes 2.5 to 3.5 hours. When the “Charge” LED turns off and the green “Ready” LED turns on, the fast charge cycle is complete and the terminal is ready for use.7.3.6  Battery Charge Fault ConditionsThe “Fault” LED remains on under one of the following circumstances:•The charger cannot read valid data from the battery pack.•The battery is not compatible with the 7942 charger.•The battery pack is set to “inhibit charge”.•The battery is defective (cell damage).•The battery temperature is outside the acceptable charge range.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesCharger Fault Conditions166 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualThe “Fault” LED blinks when a charge process has failed. Some possible causes are listed below:•The battery temperature has gone outside of the acceptable charge range.•The charger cannot communicate with the battery pack.•The battery is defective.•The battery did not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period.When the terminal is removed from the charger, the “Fault” LED should turn off. If this LED remains on after the terminal is removed, refer to “Charger Fault Conditions” on page 166.7.3.7  Charger Fault ConditionsAn internal charger fault is indicated if:•The “Fault” LED remains illuminated after the terminal is removed.•All LEDs turn on and remain illuminated when the charger is powered up.•All LEDs turn on during normal operation.Power should be cycled to the charger to correct these problems. If any of these symptoms occur persistently, the charger unit should be repaired by a qualified service technician.7.3.8  Removing The Terminal From The In-Unit ChargerTo remove the terminal from the charger:•Apply steady downward pressure to the front of the charger with one hand while pulling up on the terminal. If necessary, you may need to use a gentle, side-to-side rocking motion to slide the terminal out of the charger well.7.3.9  7942 Charger SpecificationsCharge Sites 1 dedicated for in-unit chargingCharge Time 2.5 to 3.5 hoursCompatibility Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion), Nickel-Metal Hydride (NiMH).Connection Via contacts at base of battery pack (battery must be installed in terminal).
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 167Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesThe 7967 Gang ChargerCharge Operation Charging occurs automatically upon insertion without user intervention. Indicators display charge status.Lifetime: Minimum 5000 pack insertions, typical 10,000 insertions.Reliability Self-cleaning contacts.Power Supply Autoranging (100-240 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz7.4  The 7967 Gang ChargerThe 7967 Gang Charger can charge up to six Lithium-Ion batteries at one time. 7.4.1  Connecting The Power SourceThe 7967 Gang Charger is powered using a universal AC input. It accepts voltages ranging from 100-230 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. The AC receptacle, an IEC 320 type connector, is located at the back of the charger. •Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC connector at the back of the charger.•Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source.All front panel LEDs turn on for a few seconds during a self-test mode. The “Power On” LED then remains on, indicating a power connection.•Check to make sure that the fan is running.7.4.2  Inserting And Charging The BatteryThe 7967 Gang Charger has a “Power On” LED and each charge pocket has three LEDs – Charge, Fault and Ready. Ensure that the green “Power On” LED at the front left side of the charger is “on”. The battery charge pockets are moulded, making it easy to snap the batteries into the pockets. •With the four electrical contacts facing down and textured plastic battery surface facing the front of the charger, insert the battery into a charger pocket. It should click into place. Charging will begin immediately.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesFault Conditions168 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBattery Charged And ReadyWhen the “Charge” LED turns off and the green “Ready” LED turns on, the fast charge cycle is complete, and the battery is ready for use.Typically, a fast charge takes 2.5 hours. Note that for Lithium-Ion batteries, 70% of the charge occurs within the first hour.7.4.3  Fault ConditionsThe red “Fault” LED turns on to indicate that the battery pack has been rejected or the charge process has failed. 7.4.3.1 Fault LED Turns On During A Charge•The battery temperature has changed such that it is outside of the acceptable range and the fast charge is halted. Remove the battery and permit it to warm or cool to room temperature before reinserting and restarting the charge.•The battery is defective – for example, the battery may have a weak cell, an open cell or a short.•The battery did not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period. Clean the battery contacts and try inserting the battery for charging. Check the battery parameter performance using the utility provided in the 7035. Try another recharge cycle.7.4.3.2 Fault LED Turns On At Insertion•The charger cannot read valid data from the battery. Clean the battery contacts and try charging the battery again.•In some cases, foreign matter may block the battery receptacle interface. Check the charger receptacle for debris and clear if required.•The hand-held terminal has set the pack to inhibit the charge. In this case, the battery is no longer useful and the battery should be returned to Teklogix Inc. for proper disposal. Return addresses are listed on page 161.•The battery is not compatible with this charger.•The battery temperature is outside of the acceptable range and the fast charge is inhibited. Remove the battery and permit it to warm or cool to room temperature before reinserting and restarting the charge.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 169Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories7967 Charger Specifications7.4.4  7967 Charger SpecificationsCharge Sites 6Compatibility Lithium-Ion batteries only.Connection Via contacts at top of battery pack.Charge Operation Charging occurs automatically upon insertion without user intervention. Indicators display charge status.Limitations Will not charge NiMH batteries. However, if a NiMH battery is inserted in this charger, neither the battery nor the charger will be damaged.7.5  Important Charger Safety Instructions•SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS – This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for battery charger Model 7967 and 7942.•Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) battery charger, (2) battery, and (3) product using battery.•Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury.•To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger, pull the plug rather than the cord.•Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.•Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately.•Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service personnel.•Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qualified service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.•To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesAntenna Types170 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual•An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure:•The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the charger.•The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG.•Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.•Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10°C (50°F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least two hours.•Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel.•Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm. The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel.7.6  Antenna TypesAvailable external whip antennas include a 3 inch 2.4 GHz dipole whip and a 4 inch VHF whip.Table 7.2  7035 AntennasAntenna Type Connector Type Antenna Whip Model DescriptionInternal Plastic Cap N/A N/AExternal Reverse gender SMA 2.4 GHz DipoleP.N. 206677035-SS (Spread Spectrum)External Standard SMA VHF WhipP.N. 206687035-NB(Narrowband)
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 171Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesThe 7035 Picker Cradle7.7  The 7035 Picker CradlePicker cradles provide physical support for terminals, allowing “hands-free” operation. Teklogix offers three types of picker cradles: •Model number 7937A – an unpowered picker cradle.•Model number 7937B – a powered picker cradle with 11-16VDC input.•Model number 7937C – a powered picker cradle with 10-55 VDC input.7.7.1  Mounting HardwareThe 7035 Picker Cradle can be mounted on its own or with one of the following:•Heavy-duty pedestal mount (PN 30082)•Pedestal mount with locking joint (PN 18447-001)•Vertical mounting plate (PN 18440-001)•Horizontal mount plate (PN 18448-001)•Scanner mounting plate (PN 18449-001)•Scanner holder (PN 92892)•Port replicator (PN 21658)7.7.2  InstallationNote: Where applicable, the unit should be mounted inside the roll cage.Installation requirements vary depending on the type of application used – mobile (e.g., a fork lift truck) or fixed (e.g., a work table). For a typical installation:1. Choose a suitable mounting location.2. If necessary, connect the pass-through cable to an accessory.3. Connect the power source.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesDisassembling The Cradle Before Mounting172 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7.7.3  Disassembling The Cradle Before MountingNote: If the cradle is attached from behind to a plate or pedestal mount using the four threaded holes (#8-32) in the rear bracket, it does not need to be disassembled. Ensure that the screws used are the correct length.The rear bracket of the cradle also has four ‘through’ holes that allow the cradle to be attached directly to a surface. Prior to mounting, the plastic cradle must be removed.To disassemble the cradle:•Unscrew the two hex bolts (one per side), and pull away the plastic cradle.The diagram below includes the disassembly of the pedestal mount.Figure 7.2 Disassembling The Cradle For Mounting
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 173Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesMounting The Cradle7.7.4  Mounting The Cradle•Mount the main chassis using four #8-32 machine screws and four #8-32 KEPS nuts.Note: If mounting directly to wood, use four #8 wood screws.•Replace the plastic cradle, securing it with two hex bolts (one per side).•If a pedestal mount is used, adjust the angle of the cradle to the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.7.7.5  Installing The CablesBefore installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, considerthe following:•Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.•Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating, and physical damage.•Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.•Use plastic straps to prevent cables and connectors from loosening.•Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid, and other potential hazards.•Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.•Leave enough extra cable so that the terminal can be easily removed.Note: Where applicable, ensure that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage.7.7.6  Connecting A CableWhen a picker cradle is ordered with a peripheral cable:•Connect one end of the cable to the accessory.•Connect the other end to the 7035 itself.•Secure the cable to avoid physical injury or damage to the cable.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesConnecting The Power Source174 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7.7.7  Connecting The Power SourceModel 7937A does not require a power connection. Model 7937B and 7937C have short power cords and connectors. The extension power cable (P.N. 13985) joins the cradles to a power source.If an unfused power source must be used, install the fuse assembly (P.N. 19440) provided with P.N. 13985. To connect the fuse assembly,•Push the male connector of the fuse assembly into the female connector at the positive (red) lead of the power cable.•Connect the red lead to the positive side of the battery. Connect the black lead to the negative side of the battery.Warning: Do not reverse the polarity or connect to a voltage outside the specified range.Note also that the fuse should be UL approved.7.7.8  Attaching A Port ReplicatorA port replicator, P.N. 21658, is an accessory which extends the 28-pin peripheral port connection for the 7035 terminal to an identical 28-pin fixed connector. The port replicator mounts on the underside of any of the 7035 picker cradles with 2 screws. A dsub9 COM port is also included. It is equipped with transmit, receive, ground, CTS and RTS signals. When a port replicator is attached to a cradle, you can, for example, attach a scanner to the 28-pin connector and a serial printer to the dsub9 connector.7.7.9  Picker Cradle MaintenancePicker cradles requires little maintenance.•Ensure that the inside of the plastic cradle is clear of any debris.•Avoid using strong solvents.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 175Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesInserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal7.7.10  Inserting And Removing The 7035 TerminalThe picker cradle is comprised of two parts – a fixed outer metal chassis that is secured to the vehicle or work surface, and a moveable plastic cradle in which the 7035 terminal is placed. The plastic cradle tilts forward so that the terminal can be inserted or removed, and it tilts back to lock the terminal.Figure 7.3 Unpowered Picker Cradle 7937ATo insert the 7035 in the plastic cradle,•Using your thumb and first finger, depress the two raised plastic buttons located on the top of the cradle.•Pull the plastic carrier forward until a stop is felt to ensure that the locking tabs are fully withdrawn from the plastic cradle.•Push the 7035 terminal into the plastic cradle.•Push the plastic cradle back, snapping it into place.To remove the 7035 from the plastic cradle,•Reverse the above procedure.
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesPicker Cradle LED Indicator176 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual7.7.11  Picker Cradle LED IndicatorTable 7.3  Charger IndicatorsLED Colour ConditionsGreen/Orange •Cradle is unlocked.Green•Cradle is locked.•Terminal is ON, and battery pack PN 20605-002 is installed. •Battery cells are disconnected within the battery pack, and the terminal is powered from cradle (indefinite usage).Orange•Cradle is locked.•Terminal is OFF.•Battery pack PN 20605 or 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. •Battery is charging and capacity is less than 80% charged. Red•Cradle is locked.•Terminal is OFF, and battery pack PN 20605, 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. Battery not charging because of incorrect data (charge fault).•Terminal is not inserted in cradle.Flashing Green•Cradle is locked.•Terminal is OFF.•Battery pack PN 20605 or 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. •Battery is charging and capacity is more than 80% charged. The unit is ready for mobile use.Note: If the terminal is turned “on” while charging, the terminal will signal the cradle to immediately stop the charge process.Flashing Orange•Cradle is locked.•Terminal is OFF.•Battery pack PN 20605 or 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed.•Battery temperature is lower than 10˚ C or higher than 45˚ C. Charging will begin when battery within correct temperature range.Flashing Red •Cradle is locked. •Terminal is ON and 20605 or 20605-001 battery is installed.•Terminal running off battery pack, not cradle.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 177Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesSpecifications7.7.12  Specifications7.7.12.1 PhysicalDimensions (W x H x D) 115 x 203 x 115 mm (4.5" x 8.0" x 4.5")Plastic cradle Jet Black, Bayer Makroblend EL-700Metal chassis 16 AWG cold rolled steel – black enamel over yellow chromate plateWeight 1.4 kg (3.09 lbs.)7.7.12.2 EnvironmentalOperating temperature -20˚ C to 45˚ C (-4˚ F to 113˚ F)Storage temperature -40˚ C to 60˚ C (-40˚ F to 140˚ F)Charge mode 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113˚ F)Charge pump mode 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113˚ F)Discharge mode -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F)Relative humidity 10 to 90% (non-condensing)Shock 25 G with an 11 ms rise-time on all axesVibration Random, 3-axis, 1.5g RMS, 4-500 Hz, 60 minutes.7.7.12.3 Battery PackSupported chemistry Lithium-Ion special version with internal cell disconnect.Supported cell type 4.1V or 4.2V (Varta LGR 18650P)Supported packs P.N. 20605P.N. 20605-001P.N. 20605-002Battery pack P.N. 20605Charge temperature 0˚ C to 45˚ C (32˚ F to 113˚ F).Discharge temperature  -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Battery pack P.N. 20605-001Charge temperature 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113˚ F).Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Battery pack P.N. 20605-002
Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesAgency Approvals178 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualCharge temperature 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113 ˚ F).Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Target pack types Proprietary, 2S, 7.2V 1600 mAh (Li-Ion)Charge sites 1 site for in-unit charging.Charge mode Fast charge CCCVOperation under charge Not permitted. Charging will stop when terminal is turned ON.Input power Model 7937B – 11 - 16 VDC 36 W max.Model 7937C – 10 - 55 VDC 36 W max.Input connector AMP type CPC #206153-1 on flying lead.Electrical interface 4 spring-loaded heavy-duty ‘pogo type’ pins in base of unit.Pin-out +BAT, -BAT. TEMP, DATA7.7.12.4 Agency ApprovalsUSA FCC Part 15 (EMI)UL 1950 (electrical safety) or CSA/NRTL equivalentCanada ICES-003/CSA C108.8-M1983 (EMI)CSA - C22.2 No. 950-M89 (electrical safety)Europe European “CE” mark: 72/73/EEC Low Voltage Directive89/336/EEC EMC Directive
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 179Chapter 7: Terminal AccessoriesAccessories Part Number List7.8  Accessories Part Number ListTable 7.4  Accessory Part NumbersAccessory Part #/Model #Pistol Grip Kit 20639Holster 30584Hand Strap Kit 20610-001Wrist Strap 30020Belt & Belt Loop 3013820636Shoulder Strap 30585Protective Case 30586Cradle 30600
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 181SPECIFICATIONS 888.1  Radio Specifications .............................1838.2  7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specifications ..................1868.3  8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specifications .............1888.4  Peripheral Ports................................1918.4.1  Serial Port 1 (COM 1) .........................1918.4.2  Serial Port 2 (COM 2) .........................1918.5  Memory Expansion Board ..........................1928.6  IrDA Port (7035 Only) ............................1928.7  Wireless Communication Options ......................1928.8  Bar Code Scanning ..............................1938.8.1  Internal Scanners (7035 Only) .....................1938.8.2  External Scanners ...........................1938.8.3  Internal Scanner Port (7035 Only) ...................1938.9  Internal Scanner Specifications (7035 Only).................1948.10  Power Management (7035 Only) ......................1978.10.1  Power Save States...........................1978.11  Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) ...................199
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 183Chapter 8: SpecificationsRadio SpecificationsNote: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.8.1  Radio SpecificationsImportant: Sites in Canada using Teklogix TRX7430 and TRX7440 802.11 radios require a radio licence unless they are installed totally within a building (user must obtain licence from Industry Canada).TRX7370 Narrow BandTransmit Power 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 WattsFrequency Range  403-512 MHzChannels 20Data Rates 4800, 9600, 19.2 kbpsTRX7440 (RangeLAN 802 8400) PC Card IEEE 802.11 Frequency Hopping Spread SpectrumTransmit Power 100mW (ETSI), 400mW (FCC/IC)Frequency Range 2.4 GHz - 2.5 GHzChannels 79 (FCC, ETSI)35 (FR)23 (JP)27 (SP)Data Rates 1, 2 MbpsTRX7410 & TRX7410A TekLan 902 MHz Direct Sequence Spread SpectrumTransmit Power TRX7410=1 Watt, TRX7410A=250 mWFrequency Range 902-928 MHzChannels 7Data Rates 121 kbps
Chapter 8: SpecificationsRadio Specifications184 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual*TRX7430 (WaveLAN/IEEE) PC Card IEEE 802.11 Direct Sequence Spread SpectrumTransmit Power 32 mWFrequency Range 2.4 GHz - 2.5 GHzChannels 11 (FCC)13 (ETSI)4 (FR)1 (JP)2 (SP)Data Rates 1, 2 Mbps* Refer to “Regulatory Information – TRX7430/31 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card 802.11 DS SS” on page 185 for installation and usage information.*TRX7431 (WaveLAN/IEEE) PC Card IEEE 802.11 Direct Sequence Spread SpectrumTransmit Power 32 mWFrequency Range 2.4 GHz - 2.5 GHzChannels 11 (FCC)13 (ETSI)4 (FR)1 (JP)2 (SP)Data Rates 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps* Refer to “Regulatory Information – TRX7430/31 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card 802.11 DS SS” on page 185 for installation and usage information.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 185Chapter 8: SpecificationsRadio SpecificationsRegulatory Information – TRX7430/31 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card 802.11 DS SS The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards.Canada – Industry Canada (IC)This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.Europe – EU Declaration of ConformityThis device complies with the specifications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:• ETS 300-826 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment.• ETS 300-328 Technical requirements for Radio equipment.USA – Federal Communications Commission (FCC)This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation of the devices in a WaveLAN System is subject to the following two conditions:• This device may not cause harmful interference.• This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation.The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the WaveLAN PC Card shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. When using this device in combination with WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna products, a certain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance. Refer to the Regulatory Statements as identified in the documentation that comes with those products for additional information.Interference StatementThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.Lucent Technologies is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specified by Lucent Technologies.The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. For country-specific approvals, please consult “Radio Certification Sheet – Lucent WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card Radio” – part number 80450.
Chapter 8: Specifications7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specifications186 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualTRX7460 Mobitex RadioTransmit Power 2 Watt maxFrequency Range & Channels Frequency range and number of channels is dependent on the radio module. Refer to the table below:Data Rates 8 kbps8.2  7035 Hand-Held Terminal SpecificationsPhysical Size69 mm (2.73") W x 40 mm (1.60") D, 203 mm (8") – circumference, at keyboard93 mm (3.68") W x 63 mm (2.50") D x 241 mm (9.5") H (max. overall) – without integrated scanner93 mm (3.68") W x 73 mm (2.90") D x 241 mm (9.5") H (max. overall) – with integrated scannerWeight7035 – Spread Spectrum 633 g (22.3 oz.) including battery and radio7035 – Narrow Band 763 g (26.9 oz.) including battery and radioWith integrated scanner, add 48 g (1.7 oz.)With pistol grip, add 110 g (3.9 oz.)With hand strap, add 17 g (0.6 oz.)Radio Type Transmitter Frequencies Receiver Frequencies Number of ChannelsM2150 (Two RX & TX bands)425.5 - 426.1 MHz 440.0 - 440.6 MHz 48459.6 - 459.9 MHz 453.1 - 453.4 MHz 24M2160 410.0 - 420.0 MHz 420.0 - 430.0 MHz 800M2190 896.0 - 902.0 MHz 935.0 - 941.0 MHz 480
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 187Chapter 8: Specifications7035 Hand-Held Terminal SpecificationsEnvironmentalOperating temperature 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)Storage temperature -20° to 60°C (-4° to 140°F)Relative humidity 10 to 90% (RH non-condensing)Rain/Dust IEC 529, classification IP54Shock 5 ft. drop to concrete (5 times)Warning: The battery electrolyte freezes below -30˚ C (-22 F). Frozen electrolyte will damage the battery life and capacity.CPUAm486 DX-33 derivative with 8k cache4 MB Flash ROM (BIOS, DOS, applications)8 MB RAM.Memory ExpansionProprietary plug-in card 4 MB Flash ROM, expandable to 8 MB8 MB RAM, expandable to 16 MB RAM, depot upgradeable.ElectricalConfiguration (battery pack) 1P2SPower supply (battery pack) 7.2 V nominal (6.0 V to 8.4 V maximum)Charge time Fast charge typically 2.5 hours.Capacity 1350 mAh @ 0.2C discharge to 5.5V terminalCharge temperature 0˚ C to 40˚ C (32˚ F to 104˚ F)Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F)Battery storage temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F)Battery life 8 hours minimum at 23˚ C (73.4˚ F) with backlight on 5%, 5 scan transactions per minute, TESS emulation, TRX7370 radio. Based on typical 1 year cell degradation.Charge cycles Minimum of 750 charge cycles.Performance monitor Identifies the need for pack replacement.
Chapter 8: Specifications8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specifications188 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualDisplayActive Area 62 x 62 mm (2.44" x 2.44"), 0.38 mm dot pitch.Backlight Control Automated function.Text Mode Screen Formats:ApprovalsSafety (applies to chargers) UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No950, LVD EN 60950EMC FCC Part 15 Class B, EMC Directive Class BLaser CDRH/IEC Class II8.3  8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specifications8255 – Physical Size And WeightEnclosure: 16 gauge steel – 1.5 mm (0.060") with baked enamel finishSize: 287 mm (11.3") W x 102 mm (4.0") D x 229 mm (9.0") HWeight: 3.8 kg (8.4 lbs)8260 Display – Physical Size And WeightEnclosure: 16 gauge steel – 1.5 mm (0.060") with baked enamel finishSize: 287 mm (11.3") W x 64 mm (2.5") D x 229 mm (9.0") HWeight: 3.4 kg (7.5 lbs)8260 Keyboard – Physical Size And WeightEnclosure: 16 gauge steel – 1.5 mm (0.060") with baked enamel finishSize: 287 mm (11.3") W x 64 mm (2.5") D x 229 mm (9.0") HWeight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lbs)Character Cell Character Height (mm) Lines x Column6x8 3.04 18x268 x 8 3.04 18x208 x 14 5.32 10x208 x 16 6.08 9x20
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 189Chapter 8: Specifications8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specifications8255 VFD – EnvironmentalOperating temperature -10° to 50° C (-14° to 122° F)Storage Temperature -40° to 60° C (-40° to 140° F)Relative Humidity 10 to 90% (RH non-condensing)Shock 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse, 11 ms duration on each axisRandom Vibration 1.5 g RMS, 4 Hz to 500 Hz, 60 min duration on each axisRain/Dust IEC 529, IP66 rating8255 LCD And 8260 LCD – EnvironmentalOperating temperature 0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)Storage Temperature -20° to 60° C (-4° to 140° F)Relative Humidity 10 to 90% (RH non-condensing)Shock 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse, 11 ms duration on each axisRandom Vibration 1.5 g RMS, 4 Hz to 500 Hz, 60 min duration on each axisRain/Dust IEC 529, IP66 ratingMemory ExpansionProprietary plug-in card 8 MB RAM, expandable to 16 MB.4 MB Flash ROM, expandable to 8 MB.Display – 8255 Vacuum FluorescentActive Area 52 x 166 mm (2.0" x 6.5")Backlight Control Not requiredFont Sizes (line x character) 5x32, 10x32Resolution 256 W x 80 HAttributes Normal, reverse video, blink and underline.
Chapter 8: Specifications8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specifications190 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualDisplay – 8255 Liquid CrystalActive Area 68 x 175 mm (2.7" x 6.9")Backlight Control Cold cathode fluorescent tube with programmable auto shutoff.Font Sizes (line x character) 12x80, 14x80, 25x80Resolution 640 W x 200 HAttributes Normal, reverse video, blink and underline.Display – 8260 Liquid CrystalActive Area 148 x 196 mm (5.8" x 7.7")Backlight Control Cold cathode fluorescent tube with programmable auto shutoff.Font Sizes (line x character) 25x80Resolution 640 W x 480 HAttributes Normal, reverse video, blink and underline.ApprovalsEMC FCC Part 15 Class B, CE mark for Europe•Conforms with Council Directive 89/336/EEC•Complies with standards EN 55022 class B and EN 50082.1
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 191Chapter 8: SpecificationsPeripheral Ports8.4  Peripheral PortsType External 28-pin PCR male connectorType (8255/8260 Only) External 36-pin PCR male connector8.4.1  Serial Port 1 (COM 1)Type DTE, 16550A equivalent (with 16 byte data FIFO)Electrical RS-232D signalling, maximum cable length – 50 ft. (typical – 6 ft.)Signal Lines RTS, CTS, TxD, RxDSupported Modes Standard UART with RTS/CTS handshakingApplication Interface Via standard 16550 h/w registers or BIOS serial deviceTransfer Rates 2400 - 115,000 bpsCompatibility User assigned.Protocols Application dependent.Limitations For the 7035 only, COM1 is shared with the IrDA port; only one peripheral can be active at one time. No hardware handshake support for DTR, DSR, DCD, RI.8.4.2  Serial Port 2 (COM 2)Type DTE, proprietary double-buffered (similar to 8251A)Electrical RS-232D signalling, maximum cable length – 50 ft. (typical – 6 ft.)Signal Lines TxD, RxDSupported Modes Basic UART (no hardware handshaking)Application Interface Only through BIOS serial device.Transfer Rates 2400 - 57,600 bpsCompatibility Decoded Scanners, Scan-See, download cable (serves as the “monitor” port).Protocols Application dependent.Limitations Not intended for general use with user applications. No hardware handshake support.
Chapter 8: SpecificationsMemory Expansion Board192 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual8.5  Memory Expansion BoardType Internal, plug-in printed circuit moduleAccess Not customer upgradeable.Compatibility ProprietaryDRAM 8 MBFlash ROM 4 MB8.6  IrDA Port (7035 Only)Function Intended for application download and possible batch data transfer.Compatibility IrDA Specification Version 1.1 (physical and link layer)Supported Transfer Rates All UART rates (2400 bps – 115,000 bps)Supported Modes UART (Async)Limitations Shared with serial port COM 1. Only one peripheral active at a time.8.7  Wireless Communication OptionsRefer to “Radio Specifications” on page 183 for a description of the radio types available for Teklogix 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals. Descriptions also include transmission power, data rates and channel information for each radio.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 193Chapter 8: SpecificationsBar Code Scanning8.8  Bar Code ScanningScanner Types Decoded and non-decoded.Non-Decoded Codes Supported Code 39, code 128, EAN 13, EAN 8, EAN 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, Codabar,Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved 2-of-5,MSI/PLESSY, Discrete 2-of-5.Decoded Codes Supported Dependent on external scanner choice.Code Discrimination Automatic for all selected codes, Non-Decoded input. Decoded input is external scanner dependent.8.8.1  Internal Scanners (7035 Only)Base Options Standard, Standard High Visibility or Long Range, factory installed.Scan Triggering If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the aiming dot will be enabled for a configurable time period after which normal scanning begins. Double-clicking trigger will override aiming delay and initiate immediate scan.8.8.2  External ScannersSupported Types Decoded and Non-Decoded 5V only.Interface Via peripheral port. Pinout compatible with all 7030 and 8055 scanners.8.8.3  Internal Scanner Port (7035 Only)Refer to Table B.4 “Internal Scanner Connector,” in Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams for a detailed connector table.Compatibility Symbol SE1200, SE1200LR, SE1200HV
Chapter 8: SpecificationsInternal Scanner Specifications (7035 Only)194 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual8.9  Internal Scanner Specifications (7035 Only)Table 8.1  Scanner SpecificationsParameter 7035 Standard Range(SE 1200) 7035 Long Range(SE 1200LR)Light Source Visible Laser Diode,675nm ± 5nm Visible Laser Diode,650nm ± 5nmLaser Class CDRH Class IIDIN EN 60825: July1993, Class 2CDRH Class IIDIN EN 60825: July1993, Class 2Laser Power 1.0 mW Max. Average Radiant Power 1.0 mW Max. AverageRadiant PowerPulse Power Duration Continuous ContinuousScan Angle 42˚ ± 2˚23˚ ± 2˚Scan Repetition 36 ± 3 scans/second (bidirectional) 36 ± 3 scans/second (bidirectional)Skew Tolerance ± 65˚ from normal ± 60˚ from normalPitch Angle ± 55˚ from normal ± 65˚ from normalRoll Tolerance ± 20˚ from vertical ± 10˚ from verticalSpecular Dead Zone ± 2˚ from normal ± 2˚ from normalDecode Depth of Field See Figure 8.2 on page 196. Minimum bar width is 5.0 mil (0.127 mm)See Figure 8.3 on page 197. Minimum bar width is 10.0 mil (0.254 mm)Print Contrast Minimum 20% absolute dark/light reflec-tive measured at 675 nm. 40% absolute dark/light reflec-tance measured at 675 nm.Ambient Light Immunity Sunlight: 8000 ft. candlesArtificial Light: 450 ft. candles Sunlight: 8000 ft. candlesArtificial Light: 450 ft. candles
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 195Chapter 8: SpecificationsInternal Scanner Specifications (7035 Only)Figure 8.1 Pitch, Skew And Specular Dead ZonePitch Pitch AngleScan BeamScan BeamScan PatternSkew AngleBarcode SurfaceBarcode SurfaceBarcode SurfaceScannerSide ViewTop ViewSide ViewScannerScannerSkewSpecular Dead Zone < 2ºScan Beam Barcode SurfaceSide ViewScannerRoll
Chapter 8: SpecificationsInternal Scanner Specifications (7035 Only)196 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualFigure 8.2 Decode Zone, Standard RangeSE 1200Front of terminal 5 mil3.0 4.53.0 83.0 1218202900512.7 1025.4 1538.1 2050.8 2563.5 3076.2 3588.915.59 39.610 25.45 12.7005 12.710 25.415.59 39.6Depth Of FieldWidth Of Field* Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle.357.5 mil10 mil15 mil20 mil40 mil55 mil*In.cm.In. cm.Note: Typical performance at 20˚ C (68˚ F) on high quality symbols.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 197Chapter 8: SpecificationsPower Management (7035 Only)Figure 8.3 Decode Zone, Long Range8.10  Power Management (7035 Only)BIOS Compatibility Advanced Power Management (APM) BIOS Interface Specification, Rev 1.2.8.10.1  Power Save StatesSystem power states are based on the APM definitions.APM Enabled The terminal is in full power state. All functions are active and system power is managed. The “link” indicator is displayed in uppercase letters, showing that the radio is running at full power.SE 1200LRFront of terminal 10 mil12 17910103338790 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 22043.2 109.730 76.220 50.810 25.40010 25.420 50.830 76.243.2 109.78915 mil20 mil40 mil55 mil70 16184 20970 mil reflective100 mil reflectiveDepth Of FieldNote:  Typical performance at 20ºC (68˚ F) on high quality symbols.Width Of FieldIn. cm.0 50.8 101.6 152.4 203.2 254 304.8 355.6 406.4 457.2 558.8508In.cm.
Chapter 8: SpecificationsPower Save States198 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualAPM Standby The terminal is in low power state with most devices in low power mode. The “link” indicator is displayed in lowercase letters, showing that the radio is in low power state. The CPU clock is slowed or stopped. The system state is fully retained, and the terminal returns to APM Enabled (full power) state quickly when, for example, the operator presses a key or scans a bar code. This state is not evident to the operator.APM Suspend The terminal enters Suspend state from APM Standby state after a configurable period of inactivity. The terminal also enters Suspend state when the <BLUE> <ENTER> key combination is pressed to turn the terminal off. In this state, the 7035 appears to be off. While the system context and memory are saved, the communication link is down and the terminal display is blank. To return to APM Enable state, the <ENTER/ON> key must be pressed. Returning to full power state takes approximately 4 seconds. Off The terminal enters the Off state from APM Suspend state after a configurable timeout. The terminal is completely powered off with no CPU context or memory contents saved. Only the real-time clock is maintained. To return to the APM Enabled state, the <ENTER/ON> key must be pressed. The system runs through a complete reset/reboot sequence.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 199Chapter 8: SpecificationsLithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only)8.11  Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only)Technology Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)Supported packs P.N. 20605P.N. 20605-001P.N. 20605-002Battery pack P.N. 20605Charge temperature 0˚ C to 45˚ C (32˚ F to 113˚ F).Discharge temperature  -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Battery pack P.N. 20605-001Charge temperature 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113˚ F).Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Battery pack P.N. 20605-002Charge temperature 10˚ C to 45˚ C (50˚ F to 113 ˚ F).Discharge temperature -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F).Lifespan Pack performance does not degrade below 70% of nominal under typical daily use over 2 years. (Based on 3 charge/discharge cycles every 2 days and 250 working days/year.)Charge Cycles Minimum of 750 charge cycles.Charge Time Fast charge typically in 2.5 hours.Performance Monitor Identifies the need for pack replacement.Voltage 7.2 V nominal (6.0 V to 8.4 V maximum)Capacity 1350 mAh at 7.2 V nominalWeight 115 g nominalTemperature Range -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F)Battery Life 8 hours minimum at 23˚ C (73.4˚ F) with back-light on 5%, 5 scan transactions per minute, TESS emulation, TRX7370 radio. Based on typical 1 year cell degradation.Supported Chargers Model #7967 – 6-gang custom chargerModel #7942 – In-unit charger
Chapter 8: SpecificationsLithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only)200 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualMemory No memory effect.Battery Gauge Indicates remaining capacity, 0 to 100%, resolution 10%. Nominal capacity of battery pack is displayed as a reference.Graceful Power Fail Operator is notified when battery capacity is low.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual A-1APPENDIX AASUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICESA.1  Support ServicesTeklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers.  In North America, these services can be accessed through the Teklogix Helpdesk.  The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training, helps you to troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site.  These ser-vices are also available through our Worldwide Offices.A.1.1  North American HelpdeskTechnical SupportVoice: 1 800 387-8898Fax: 1 905 812-6304E-mail: helpdesk@teklogix.comRepair ServicesVoice: 1 800 387-8898Fax: 1 905 812-6304E-mail: rma@teklogix.comWeb Site: http://service.teklogix.comA.1.2  International SupportFor support outside of North America, please contact your local Teklogix office.  See page 3 for a current listing of worldwide Teklogix offices.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual A-3A.2  WORLDWIDE OFFICESWORLD HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRETeklogix Inc.2100 Meadowvale BoulevardMississaugaOntarioCanada L5N 7J9Tel: +1 905 813 9900Fax: +1 905 812 6300Email: salescdn@teklogix.comINTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIESTeklogix GmbHJakob Kaiser Straße 3D-47877 Willich MünchheideDeutschlandTel: +49 2154 9282 0Fax: +49 2154 9282 59Email: info@teklogix.deTeklogix S.A.Parc Club Du Golf Bâtiment 113856 Aix-en-ProvenceCedex 3, FranceTel: +33 4 4224 5740Fax: +33 4 4239 4632Email: tekeuro@teklogix.comTeklogix LTD.3, Lancaster Court Coronation Road High WycombeBucks HP123TDEnglandTel: +44 1494 450666Fax: +44 1494 450155WWW: www.teklogix.co.ukEmail: tekuk@teklogix.comTeklogix ABStora Badhusgatan 18-20411 21 GöthenburgSwedenTel: +46 31 13 15 50Fax: +46 31 13 57 80Email: info@teklogix.seNORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U.S. SERVICE CENTRETeklogix Corp.1810 Airport Exchange BoulevardSuite 500Erlanger, KentuckyUSA 41018Tel: +1 606 371 6006Fax: +1 606 371 6422Email: salesusa@teklogix.comTeklogix FinlandMetsänneidonkuja 802130 EspooFinlandTel: +358 9 4307 8390Fax: +358 9 4307 8395Email: tekeuro@teklogix.comTeklogix DanmarkVesterballevej 4-67000 FredericiaDanmarkTel: +45 76 24 0133Fax: +45 75 94 4679Email: tedk@teklogix.comTeklogix Italia S.r.IVia Galilei, 4720092 Cinisello BalsamoMilan, ItalyTel: +39 2 6604 5410Fax: +39 2 6604 5412Email: tkxitalia@teklogix.comTeklogix Inc. (Singapore)583 Orchard Road# 15-01 ForumSingapore 238884Tel: +65 735 8108Fax: +65 733 5990Email: intl@teklogix.comTeklogix de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.Sierra Mojada 626, 2º PisoCol. Lomas Barrilaco, C.P. 11010Mexico, D.F., MexicoTel: +52 5 327 1124Fax: +52 5 327 1123Email: salesusa@teklogix.comTeklogix do Brasil, Ltda.Al. Casa Branca, 851 - conj. 101 e 102São Paulo - SP - 01408-001BrasilTel: +55 11 3064 0868Fax: +55 11 3068 8198WWW: www.teklogixbrasil.com.brEmail: tekbr@teklogix.comChile Teklogix International Inc.Avenida Vitacura 2909, Oficina 703Las CondesSantiago, ChileTel: +56 2 334 9344Fax: +56 2 233 3868Email: ventas@teklogix.comTeklogix de Argentina, S.A.Avenida Morceau de Justo 1180Piso 1, Oficina C-105Buenos Aires 1107ArgentinaTel: +54 11 4343 0193Fax: +54 11 4343 6310Email: tekar@teklogix.com
A-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualTeklogix España, S.L.Cityparc Ronda de DaltCtra. Hospitalet 147-149Edificio Atenas 2˚ 3ª08940 Cornellà de Llobregat (Barcelona)EspañaTel: +34 9 3475 0220Fax: +34 9 3475 0230Email: teklogix@apdo.comTeklogix Systems India Pvt. Ltd.M-74, 1st Floor, “M” Block MarketGreater Kailash-IlNew Delhi - 110048IndiaTel: +91 11 621 9257Fax: +91 11 621 9076Email: tekind@teklogix.comA.3  WORLD WIDE WEBwww.teklogix.com
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-1APPENDIX BBPORT PINOUTS AND CABLE DIAGRAMSB.1  7035 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR)Function Pin Signal Name DescriptionGround 1 GND Digital ground.2 GND Digital ground.Audio 3 MIC Microphone input.4 LINE_OUT Line level audio outputAlarm 5 BEEP External beeper output.EMI Shield 6 SHIELD Digital ground.Diagnos-tic Mode 7 DIAGInput. If grounded at power up, causes terminal to enter diagnostic mode. Menu allows flash-ROM upgrade and other test modes.Non-Decoded Scanner8 SCNR_ENABLE Output enable to initiate external scan engine.9 SCNR_ACK Output scan acknowledge. Currently drives decode LED on external scanner.10 SCNR_TRIG Scanner trigger input.11 SCNR_DATA Scanner undecoded serial data input.12 SCNR_SOS Not usedSerialPort 2 COM 213 SERIAL2_RXD Serial data input RS-232D.14 SERIAL2_TXD Serial data output RS-232D.Power 15 P7_2V Switched +7.2V battery power.16 P7_2V Switched +7.2V battery power.
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR)B-2 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual A.1  7035 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-pin PCR)B.2  8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR)ScannerPower17 5V_SCAN_PWR 5 V scanner power (duplicate of pin 18).18 5V_SCAN_PWR/TX_KEY 5 V scanner power/transmit monitor signal for radio test.19 EXP0 Expansion 0.20 CV_OUT Control voltage output.Radio Test21 EXP1 Expansion 1.22 EXP2 Expansion 2.23 EXP3 Expansion 3.24 EXP4 Expansion 4.SerialPort 1(COM1)25 RTS1 Request-to-send (output) RS-232D.26 CTS1 Clear-to-send (input) RS-232D.27 SERIAL1_TX Serial transmit data RS-232D.28 SERIAL1_RX Serial receive data RS-232D.Function Pin Signal Name DescriptionGround 1 GND Digital ground.2 GND Digital ground.Audio 3 MIC Microphone input.4 LINE_OUT Line level audio outputAlarm 5 BEEP External beeper output.EMI Shield 6 SHIELD Digital ground.Diagnos-tic Mode 7 DIAGInput. If grounded at power up, causes terminal to enter diagnostic mode. Menu allows flash-ROM upgrade and other test modes.Function Pin Signal Name Description
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-3Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR) A.2  8255/8260 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR)Non-Decoded Scanner8 SCNR_ENABLE Output enable to initiate external scan engine.9 SCNR_ACK Output scan acknowledge. Currently drives decode LED on external scanner.10 SCNR_TRIG Scanner trigger input.11 SCNR_DATA Scanner undecoded serial data input.12 SCNR_SOS Not usedSerialPort 2 COM 213 SERIAL2_RXD Serial data input RS-232D.14 SERIAL2_TXD Serial data output RS-232D.Power 15 12V Unswitched 12VDC, 500 mA fuse.16 12V Unswitched 12VDC ,500 mA fuse.ScannerPower17 12V_SCAN_PWR 12 V switched scanner power.18 5V_SCAN_PWR 5 V switched scanner power.19 NC NC20 CV_OUT Control voltage output.21 5V_Ext 5V unswitched, 500 mA fuse.22 BXT_Data For Teklogix use only.23 NC NC24 BXT_CLK For Teklogix use only.SerialPort 1(COM1)25 RTS1 Request-to-send (output) RS-232D.26 CTS1 Clear-to-send (input) RS-232D.27 SERIAL1_TX Serial transmit data RS-232D.28 SERIAL1_RX Serial receive data RS-232D.Function Pin Signal Name Description
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR)B-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualB.3  8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR)Function Pin Signal Name DescriptionBattery 1 GND System ground.2 GND System ground.Voice 3 MIC Microphone input.4 SPKR Speaker output.Ground 5 SHIELD System ground.6 EXP_PORT 0 Reserved for future expansion.Ground 7 GND System ground.8 EXP_PORT 1 Reserved for future expansion.Ground 9 GND System ground.10 EXP_PORT 2 Reserved for future expansion.Ground 11 GND System ground.12 EXP_PORT 3 Reserved for future expansion.Ground 13 GND System ground.14 EXP_PORT 4 Reserved for future expansion.15 EXP_PORT 5 Reserved for future expansion.Ground 16 GND System ground.17 EXP_PORT 6 Reserved for future expansion.18 RTS_2 EXP_PORT_COM1–19 CTS_2 EXP_PORT_COM1–20 TXD_2 EXP_PORT_COM1–21 RXD_2 EXP_PORT_COM1Power 22 8.0V 8V output. 500 mA fuse.23 8.0V 8V output. 500 mA fuse.Alarm 24 BEEP External beeper output.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-5Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR) A.3  8255/8260 Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR)EMI Shield 25 SHIELD System ground.26 EXP_PORT 7 Reserved for future expansion.27 EXP_PORT 8 Reserved for future expansion.28 EXP_PORT 9 Reserved for future expansion.29 Keyboard GND For Teklogix use only.30 Keyboard 5 V For Teklogix use only.31 Keyboard CLK For Teklogix use only.32 Keyboard Data For Teklogix use only.RS-232 Port 133 RTS_B Output handshake signal for RS-232 port 1 to processor.34 CTS_B Input handshake signal for RS-232 port 1 to processor.35 TX_DATA_B Output data for RS-232 port 1 to processor.36 RX_DATA_B Input data for RS-232 port 1 to processor.Function Pin Signal Name Description
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable DiagramsInternal Scanner ConnectorB-6 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualB.4  Internal Scanner Connector A.4  Internal Scanner ConnectorB.5  Flash Serial Download Cable A.5  Download CablePin Signal Name Description1 SHIELD Chassis ground.2 5V_SCAN_PWR 5 V scanner power, software switched.3RANGE_LIMIT/TARGET DOTEnables range limiter function to improve bar code discrimination at short distances (out-put, active low) for standard range 7035. Enables aim dot for 7035 LR (long range).4 LASER_ENABLE Enables scanner laser (output, active low) – generates aim dot.5 SCAN_ENABLE Scanner enable (output, active low) – enables scan motor.6 SCAN_DATA Scanner data (input).7 SCAN_SOS Start-of-Scan (input).8 GROUND Digital ground.9 GROUND Digital ground.10 SHIELD Chassis ground.Pin Signal Name Description1 GND System ground.2 KEY_CONFIG. 0 System ground.6 SHIELD Shield ground.7 BOOT_MON_EXT If held low at Power ON, terminal enters BOOT menu.13 SCNR_SERIAL_IN Serial data receive signal.14 SCNR_SERIAL_OUT Serial data transmit signal.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-7Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams28-Pin PCR To 8-Pin DIN Connector – P.N. 19726B.6  28-Pin PCR To 8-Pin DIN Connector – P.N. 19726B.7  28-Pin PCR To 7-Pin DIN Connector – P.N. 19727Ground 168910111314183TAB654218728-Pin PCR 8-Pin DINShield (CASE)EnableAck 5VTriggerScanner DataSerial InSerial OutScanner Power 5VGroundShieldEnableAckTriggerScanner DataSerial InSerial Out5V OutputFemale FemaleTERMINAL SCANNER CABLEGround 1689101118173TAB654218X7FemaleTERMINAL28-Pin PCRFemaleSCANNER CABLE7-Pin DINShield (CASE)EnableAck 5VTriggerScanner DataScanner Power to 5VScanner Power*GroundShieldEnableAckTriggerScanner Data+5V OutputPower Output** 7.2V for 7030  12V for 8055/8060
Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable DiagramsFlash Serial Download Cable – P.N. 20075B-8 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualB.8  Flash Serial Download Cable – P.N. 20075B.9  Scanner Wand Adaptor Cable – P.N. 30092Ground 12671314532Female Female28-Pin PCR DE9GroundShieldBOOT_MON_EXTScanner Serial InScanner Serial OutGroundTransmitReceive7030/8055/8060 TERMINAL PC SERIAL PORTXGround 1611182103TAB217FemaleTERMINALHonda 28-Pin PCRFemaleSCANNER CABLE8-Pin DINShield (CASE)Scanner Data5V Scanner PowerGroundGroundShieldScanner Data+5VGround
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual C-1APPENDIX CCASCII CHARACTER TABLEBINARY DEC ASCII HEX0000 0000 0 NUL 000000 0001 1 SOH 010000 0010 2 STX 020000 0011 3 ETX 030000 0100 4 EOT 040000 0101 5 ENQ 050000 0110 6 ACK 060000 0111 7 BELL 070000 1000 8 BS 080000 1001 9 TAB 090000 1010 10 LF 0A0000 1011 11 VT 0B0000 1100 12 FF 0C0000 1101 13 CR 0D0000 1110 14 SO 0E0000 1111 15 SI 0F0001 0000 16 DLE 100001 0001 17 DC1 110001 0010 18 DC2 120001 0011 19 DC3 130001 0100 20 DC4 140001 0101 21 NAK 150001 0110 22 SYN 160001 0111 23 ETB 170001 1000 24 CAN 180001 1001 25 EM 190001 1010 26 SUB 1A0001 1011 27 ESC 1B0001 1100 28 FS 1C0001 1101 29 GS 1D0001 1110 30 RS 1E0001 1111 31 US 1F0010 0000 32 Space 200010 0001 33 ! 210010 0010 34 “ 220010 0011 35 # 230010 0100 36 $ 240010 0101 37 % 250010 0110 38 & 260010 0111 39 ‘ 270010 1000 40 ( 280010 1001 41 ) 290010 1010 42 * 2A0010 1011 43 + 2B0010 1100 44 , 2C0010 1101 45 - 2D0010 1110 46 . 2E0010 1111 47 / 2F0011 0000 48 0 300011 0001 49 1 310011 0010 50 2 320011 0011 51 3 330011 0100 52 4 340011 0101 53 5 350011 0110 54 6 360011 0111 55 7 370011 1000 56 8 380011 1001 57 9 390011 1010 58 : 3A0011 1011 59 ; 3BBINARY DEC ASCII HEX
Appendix C: ASCII Character TableC-2 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual0011 1100 60 < 3C0011 1101 61 = 3D0011 1110 62 > 3E0011 1111 63 ? 3F0101 0000 64 @ 400101 0001 65 A 410101 0010 66 B 420101 0011 67 C 430101 0100 68 D 440101 0101 69 E 450101 0110 70 F 460101 0111 71 G 470101 1000 72 H 480101 1001 73 I 490101 1010 74 J 4A0101 1011 75 K 4B0101 1100 76 L 4C0101 1101 77 M 4D0101 1110 78 N 4E0101 1111 79 O 4F0101 0000 80 P 500101 0001 81 Q 510101 0010 82 R 520101 0011 83 S 530101 0100 84 T 540101 0101 85 U 550101 0110 86 V 560101 0111 87 W 570101 1000 88 X 580101 1001 89 Y 590101 1010 90 Z 5A0101 1011 91 [ 5B0101 1100 92 \ 5C0101 1101 93 ] 5D0101 1110 94 ^ 5E0101 1111 95 _ 5F0110 0000 96 ‘ 600110 0001 97 a 610110 0010 98 b 62BINARY DEC ASCII HEX0110 0011 99 c 630110 0100 100 d 640110 0101 101 e 650110 0110 102 f 660110 0111 103 g 670110 1000 104 h 680110 1001 105 i 690110 1010 106 j 6A0110 1011 107 k 6B0110 1100 108 l 6C0110 1101 109 m 6D0110 1110 110 n 6E0110 1111 111 o 6F0111 0000 112 p 700111 0001 113 q 710111 0010 114 r 720111 0011 115 s 730111 0100 116 t 740111 0101 117 u 750111 0111 118 v 760111 0111 119 w 770111 1000 120 x 780111 1001 121 y 790111 1010 122 z 7A0111 1011 123 { 7B0111 1100 124 | 7C0111 1101 125 } 7D0111 1110 126 ~ 7E0111 1111 127 7F1000 0000 128 Ç 801000 0001 129 ü 811000 0010 130 é 821000 0011 131 â 831000 0100 132 ä 841000 0101 133 à 851000 0110 134 å 861000 0111 135 ç 871000 1000 136 ê 881000 1001 137 ë 89BINARY DEC ASCII HEX
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual C-3Appendix C: ASCII Character Table1000 1010 138 è 8A1000 1011 139 ï 8B1000 1100 140 å 8C1000 1101 141 ì 8D1000 1110 142 Ä 8E1000 1111 143 Å 8F1001 0000 144 É 901001 0001 145 æ 911001 0010 146 Æ 921001 0011 147 ô 931001 0100 148 ö 941001 0101 149 ò 951001 0110 150 û 961001 0111 151 ù 971001 1000 152 ÿ 981001 1001 153 Ö 991001 1010 154 Ü 9A1001 1011 155 ¢ 9B1001 1100 156 £ 9C1001 1101 157 ¥ 9D1001 1110 158 P 9E1001 1111 159 ƒ 9F1010 0000 160 á A01010 0001 161 í A11010 0010 162 ó A21010 0011 163 ú A31010 0100 164 ñ A41010 0101 165 Ñ A51010 0110 166 ª A61010 0111 167 º A71010 1000 168 ¿ A81010 1010 169 _ A91010 1010 170 AA1010 1011 171 ∫AB1010 1100 172 πAC1010 1101 173 ¡ AD1010 1110 174 « AE1010 1111 175 » AF1011 0000 176 B0BINARY DEC ASCII HEX1011 0001 177 B11011 0010 178 B21011 0011 179 B31011 0100 180 B41011 0101 181 B51011 0110 182 B61011 0111 183 B71011 1000 184 B81011 1001 185 B91011 1010 186 BA1011 1011 187 BB1011 1100 188 BC1011 1101 189 BD1011 1110 190 BE1011 1111 191 BF1100 0000 192 C01100 0001 193 C11100 0010 194 C21100 0011 195 C31100 0100 196 C41100 0101 197 C51100 0110 198 C61100 0111 199 C71100 1000 200 C81100 1001 201 C91100 1010 202 CA1100 1011 203 CB1100 1100 204 CC1100 1101 205 CD1100 1110 206 CE1100 1111 207 CF1101 0000 208 D01101 0001 209 D11101 0010 210 D21101 0011 211 D31101 0100 212 D41101 0101 213 D51101 0110 214 D61101 0111 215 D7BINARY DEC ASCII HEX
Appendix C: ASCII Character TableC-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBINARY: 128 | 64 | 32 | 16 | 8 | 4 | 2 | 1OCTAL: 512 | 64 | 8 | 1HEX: 256 | 16 | 11101 1000 216 D81101 1001 217 D91101 1010 218 DA1101 1011 219 DB1101 1100 220 DC1101 1101 221 DD1101 1110 222 DE1101 1111 223 DF1110 0000 224 E01110 0001 225 ß E11110 0010 226 E21110 0011 227 E31110 0100 228 E41110 0101 229 E51110 0110 230 µ E61110 0111 231 E71110 1000 232 E81110 1001 233 E91110 1010 234 EA1110 1011 235 EB1110 1100 236 EC1110 1101 237 ED1110 1110 238 EE1110 1111 239 EF1111 0000 240 F01111 0001 241 F11111 0010 242 F21111 0011 243 F31111 0100 244 F41111 0101 245 F51111 0110 246 F61111 0111 247 F71111 1000 248 F81111 1001 249 F91111 1010 250 FA1111 1011 251 FB1111 1100 252 FC1111 1101 253 FD1111 1110 254 FE1111 1111 255 FFBINARY DEC ASCII HEX
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-1APPENDIX DDRADIO PARAMETERSImportant: Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system.D.1  TRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio ParametersImportant: Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds.ESSIDThe ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier) is a string of characters, to a maximum of 32, that the terminal uses to determine with which access points it can communi-cate. The terminal will only communicate with access points configured with the same ESSID. If a value is not assigned for this parameter or if “ANY” is entered, the terminal will communicate with any available access point.ESSID TEKLOGIX see textStation see textAP Density Low see textData Rate Auto see textReservation 2347 0-2347Pwr Saving Y» see textNetwork Infra Infra, AdhocChannel 1 1-14CIS Data » see textRange802.11 DS SS
Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio ParametersD-2 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualStationThe value entered in this parameter, to a maximum of 32 characters, is used to identify the terminal (an 802.11 station) for diagnostic purposes.AP DensityThis parameter determines the density of access points in a network. The density can be set to one of the following: Low, Medium or High.Data RateThe value entered in this parameter specifies the data rate to be used for message transmission. The data rate can be set to one of the following: 1Mbit, 2Mbit or Auto.Reservation“Reservation” specifies the medium reservation setting to be used. The medium reservation specifies the number of octets in a message or fragment above which a RTS/CTS handshake is performed to reserve the medium for the message or fragment transmission. Setting this parameter to the maximum allowable value, 2347, disables medium reservation.Pwr SavingWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the radio operates in power saving mode, utilizing the parameters listed in this sub-menu.Rx MulticastsWhen this parameter is set to “Y”, the terminal wakes from a sleep or suspend state each time a multicast – a broadcast sent to multiple recipients from a single packet – is sent over the network. “Rx Multicast” should be left disabled (set to “N”).RX Multicasts N Y/NSleep Duration 100 1-65535RangePwr Saving
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-3Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio ParametersSleep DurationThe value assigned for this parameter determines how many milliseconds must pass before the terminal enters a full power state from a suspend state in order to check for messages. If none exist, the terminal returns to suspend state.Important: If this parameter is set at too high a value, you risk missing mes-sages sent over the network.NetworkThe value assigned for this parameter – Infra or Adhoc – configures the radio to operate in either an Ad Hoc (“Adhoc”) or Infrastructure (“Infra”) network. In an Ad Hoc network, terminals pass data directly to other terminals – an access point is not required. In an Infrastructure network, terminals must pass data through an access point – terminals cannot communicate directly with other terminals in the network.ChannelImportant: The “Channel” parameter takes effect only when the “Network” parameter is set to Adhoc.The channel number you choose must be the same for all terminals on the network that are set to Adhoc.CIS DataThis sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal.Lucent TechnologiesWaveLAN/IEEEVersion 01.0100:60:1D:03:79:E510 - FCC-USA20 - Industry CanadaCIS Data
Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio ParametersD-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualD.2  TRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio ParametersImportant: Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds.ESSIDThe ESSID (Extended Service Set Identifier) is a string of characters, to a maximum of 32, that the terminal uses to determine with which access points it can communi-cate. The terminal will only communicate with access points configured with the same ESSID. If a value is not assigned for this parameter or if “ANY” is entered, the terminal will communicate with any available access point.Hop SetThis parameter only takes effect when the terminal is configured for “Adhoc” operation. The “Hop Set” value must be consistent for all stations in the Ad Hoc network.Hop PatternLike the “Hop Set” parameter, this parameter only takes effect when the terminal is configured for “Adhoc” operation. The value assigned for this parameter must be consistent for all stations in the Ad Hoc network.ESSID TEKLOGIX see textHop Set 1 1-3Hop Pattern 1 1-26Pwr Saving Y Y/NNetwork Infra Infra, AdhocRoaming Y Y/NCIS Data » see textRange802.11 FH SS
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-5Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio ParametersPwr SavingWhen this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the radio operates in power saving mode by default.NetworkThe value assigned for this parameter – Infra or Adhoc – configures the radio to operate in either an Ad Hoc (“Adhoc”) or Infrastructure (“Infra”) network. In an Ad Hoc network, terminals pass data directly to other terminals – an access point is not required. In an Infrastructure network, terminals must pass data through an access point – terminals cannot communicate directly with other terminals in the network.RoamingWhen “Roaming” is set to “Y”, the terminal (802.11 station) can roam from one access point to another. This parameter should only be enabled (set to “Y”) when the radio is configured for Infrastructure network operation.CIS DataThis sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal.PROXIM802.11 PC CARDRANGELAN802STATIONCIS Data
Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7370 Narrow Band Radio ParametersD-6 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualD.3  TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio ParametersImportant: Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds.D.3.1  CellularRadio AddressImportant: “Radio Address” only takes effect when “Cellular” is enabled (set to “Y”).The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal.Cellular Y » see textChannel » see textPoll Timing » see textPower Saving Y » see textCIS Data »TRX7370 RangeRadio Address 0 0-3840Cellular Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-7Appendix D: Radio ParametersChannelD.3.2  ChannelChannel #This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the terminal. The channel selected must be an enabled channel. Refer to “Channel Enable” on page C-7 for details about enabling channels.Power-Up ChanIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the terminal will start communicating on the channel specified in the “Channel #” parameter when the terminal is powered up. This setting may prevent the migration of terminals to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites. If this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the terminal will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was turned off.Channel EnableThese parameters are used to enable (Y) or disable (N) up to 20 channels – the maximum number of channels supported by the TRX7370 radio. Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (“Channel #”) and also makes the channel available for channel searching. If, for example, the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled, the terminal may roam through all 20 channels. Note that the “Channel Enable” menu only displays channels that have been configured with frequencies.Channel # 1 1-20Power-up chan Y Y/NChannel Enable » see textSwitch speed Slow Fast/SlowManual table N» see textChannel RangeCH  1 enable Y Y/N•••CH 20 enable Y Y/NRangeChan enable
Appendix D: Radio ParametersChannelD-8 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualSwitch SpeedThis parameter changes the threshold the terminal uses to determine when commu-nication quality with a base station is unacceptable. When this threshold is exceeded, the terminal starts channel searching for a new base station. Setting this parameter to “Slow” means a higher threshold – the terminal is more tol-erant of poor communication quality. When the communication quality of the termi-nal radio drops below 46%, the terminal monitors the channel quality for 15 time-out periods before searching for a new channel.If “Switch speed” is set to “Fast”, the current channel is monitored for only up to2 time-out periods before channel switching begins.Important: “Fast Switch” is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping. If the coverage areas barely overlap, have dead spots, or if the terminal frequently operates on the fringe of cover-age, this parameter should be set to “Slow”.Manual TableThis parameter can be used to set the channel search order the terminal will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required. If this parameter is left at the default setting of “N”, the terminal uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality.If “Manual Table” is set to “Y”, the terminal uses the channel switching lists specified in the Manual Table. Each channel list consists of up to 8 channels, with all channels enabled before they are entered into the “Manual Table”.  If communication quality falls below 46%, only the channels entered in the“Manual Table” are considered for channel switching. The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were entered in the table.CH  1 list 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0•••CH 20 list 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Manual Table
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-9Appendix D: Radio ParametersPoll TimingTo move the cursor to the right to the next channel in a channel list:•Press the <TAB> key.To move the cursor to the left in a channel list:•Press <SHIFT><TAB>.Warning: It is not recommended that the “Manual table” parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance.D.3.3  Poll TimingSync DelayImportant: This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing.“Sync delay” specifies the delay between the time of the base station transmission and the first response window, measured in milliseconds. The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system. The default setting of 17 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud.Sync Delay 17 1-40Window Delay 19 1-40Poll Timeout 20 1-40Late Tx Limit 2 1-10Poll Timing Range
Appendix D: Radio ParametersPoll TimingD-10 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualWindow DelayImportant: The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol.This parameter specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) the terminal should add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive/transmit switching characteristics of the radio. The value assigned must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system. The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud.Poll TimeoutThis parameter (in units of 16.6 ms) sets the time-out value used for automatic channel switching. “Poll Timeout” is the time during which the terminal should hear at least one poll from a base station. As each “Poll Timeout” passes without a successful poll from the base station, the terminal channel quality decreases. If the channel quality falls to below 46%, the terminal begins searching for a new channel.Late Tx LimitThe value entered for this parameter (measured in milliseconds) sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which a terminal can make a transmission. After this threshold, the transmission will not be attempted and the terminal will try again at the next opportunity. For example, suppose this parameter is set to 5. From the beginning of the response window, the terminal can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission. Beyond this threshold, the transmission is not attempted. The terminal waits for the next opportunity.
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-11Appendix D: Radio ParametersPower SavingD.3.4  Power SavingIdle Poll LimitThis parameter determines how many transmit opportunities – base station polls with available response windows – must be consecutively skipped for the terminal to put the radio into power-down mode for power saving. Lower values cause the terminal to go into power saving mode quickly, extending battery life but reducing terminal responsiveness. Higher values increase responsiveness but decrease battery life. “Idle Poll Limit” is only used when “Power Saving” is enabled (set to “Y”).Pwr Off TimeThis parameter determines the amount of time (in seconds) the terminal will keep the radio in power-down mode when a power down period has been initiated. “Pwr Off Time” is only used when “Power Saving” is enabled (set to “Y”).D.3.5  CIS DataThis sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in the terminal.Idle Poll Limit 10 1-200Pwr Off Time 10 1-60RangePower Saving
Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7410/10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio ParametersD-12 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualD.4  TRX7410/10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio ParametersRadio AddressThe value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link. A unique value from 0 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal.D.4.1  ChannelChannel #This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the terminal. The channel selected must be an enabled channel. Refer to “Channel Enable” on page D-7 for details about enabling channels.Power-Up ChanIf this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the terminal will start communicating on the channel specified in the “Channel #” parameter when the terminal is powered up. This setting may prevent the migration of terminals to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites. If this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the terminal will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was turned off.Radio Address 0 0-3840Channel » see textWlan Timing » see textPower Saving Y » see textCIS Data »WLAN 902 SS RangeChannel # 1 1-7Power-up chan Y Y/NChannel Enable » see textChannel Auto » see textChannel Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-13Appendix D: Radio ParametersChannelChannel EnableThese parameters are used to enable (Y) or disable (N) up to 7 channels – the maximum number of channels supported by the 902 spread spectrum radio. Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (“Channel #”) and also makes the channel available for channel searching. If, for example, the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled, the terminal may roam through all 7 channels. Note that the “Channel Enable”menu only displays channels that have been configured with frequencies.Channel AutoThese parameters are available in the “Chan-auto” sub-menu. “Next ch-auto” determines the order of the auto-switched channels. In the first “Next ch-auto” parameter, enter the number of the first channel to which you want the terminal to consider switching. In the next parameter, enter the next channel, and so on. Enter “0” (zero) for no channel.CH  1 enable Y Y/N•••CH 7 enable Y Y/NRangeChan enableNext ch-auto 1 0-7•••Next ch-auto 7 0-7RangeChan Auto
Appendix D: Radio ParametersWLAN TimingD-14 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualD.4.2  WLAN TimingReinit tmo“Reinit tmo” controls how soon a terminal sends a warm initialize message to the controller when a cellular acknowledgement is not received for a previously sent message. This parameter operates in units of seconds and is set to 10 by default.D.4.3  Power SavingPwrON timeThis parameter is used in conjunction with “PwrOFF time” to control the duration of time the radio stays on after a message is sent (twice this period if application data is sent). “PwrON time” is in units of 1/2 seconds. The range is 0 to 20 and increases the radio on time in increments of 0.5 seconds. “PwrON time” should be set from 8 to 20 for 902 MHz radios.Important: Using power saving in Wireless LAN will affect system perfor-mance since terminals cannot receive routing information when the radio is turned off, and will thus be slower to hop to new routes. Therefore, the “PwrON time” parameter should not be set lower than 5.Reinit tmo 10 5-20RangeWLAN TimingPwrON time 0 0-20PwrOFF time 0 0-20PwrON xmit 0 1-20Power Saving Range
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-15Appendix D: Radio ParametersCIS DataPwrOFF timeThis parameter is used in conjunction with “PwrON time” to reduce the power consumption of the radio. The terminal turns off for this period of time, and following the power off time, turns on for a very short period of time to determine if the terminal is still on-line. If the terminal is on-line, it is turned off for the “PwrOFF time”. If the terminal is off-line, it is re-initialized and stays on for the “PwrON time”.In cellular mode, the radio turns off for twice this period after all channels have been checked and no suitable channel is found. This parameter is in units of 1/2 seconds. To disable this parameter, set it to zero.PwrON xmitThis parameter determines the amount of time the radio stays on after a transmission, waiting for a response from the base station.Important: If the value in the “PwrON Xmit” is set too low, the terminal may miss the response from the base station, resulting in a lock-up for the user. This parameter needs to be set between 2 and 20 depend-ing on the response time of the system. For example, if the host responds slowly, the value in this parameter should be set to a higher value.D.4.4  CIS DataThis sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data – that is manufac-turer information describing the radio installed in your terminal.D.5  TRX7460 Mobitex RadioController MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number)This is the “Mobitex Subscription Number” (MAN) – the address of the 9450 Network Controller with which your terminal communicates. It is a factory assigned value.Controller MAN 5000735 see textCIS Data » see textRadio Mode Normal see textMobitex Range
Appendix D: Radio ParametersTRX7460 Mobitex RadioD-16 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualCIS DataThis sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal.Radio ModeThis parameter offers two options – Normal and Battery Saving. When “Normal” is selected, Power Saving is turned off. When “Battery Saving” is selected, the terminal radio is powered down while not in use to slow battery consumption. It will periodically “wake up” to check for incoming information. Keep in mind, however, that choosing this option results in slower response times.ERICSSONMobidemMASC/4R6ACIS Data
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual IINDEXBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalAaborts, radio link (ra)  56accessoriesantenna types  170bar code readers, connecting  159part numbers  179picker cradle (7035)  1717942 in-unit charger  1637967 battery pack charger  167Addendum  109, 110, 111, 112addresses, network See also Network addresses  153Adhoc and Infra networks  D-3, D-5AIAGMixed AIAG  135AIAG Strip  106All Fld Video  137Alpha parameters  85Anchor Column  146Anchor Line  146Anchor Viewx origin  139y origin  139ANSIApplications menu  115Auto Wrap  118Auto-Answer  124Columns  118configuration  73Conn Type (connection type)  117CR character  124Dev Attr  123device attribute requests  73Echo Mode  124ENTER key  125Function key equivalents  74Host (Connection Type)  117LF character  124multiple sessions  115Newline  124Pages  117Port  117Rows  118sessions, closing  76sessions, establishing new  75sessions, listing  75sessions, moving between  75settings  116–125TCP Direct connection  117Telnet connection  117Terminal #  116transmitting data  107, 109ANSI SettingsAsync In (Serial)  126character sets, choosing  119Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct  117keyboard settings  124Screen settings  117Start and End (Serial)  126transmission strings, settings  123Transmit parameters  123antennainstalling on 8255 or 8260  24installing 7035  17AP Density  D-2App. parameter  128Append Enter  135Append F0  135appending to bar codescharacters  104, 107, 109ApplicationsANSI Settings  116–125Async In  (ANSI)  126character attributes (TESS)  129Character Sets (ANSI)  119Character Sets (TESS)  130
IndexII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalFeatures parameters (TESS)  138Fields parameters (TESS)  136Host Conn (ANSI)  117Host Conn (TESS)  127Keyboard parameters (ANSI)  124menu (Applications)  115Name and Type  116Scanner parameters (TESS)  134Screen parameters (ANSI)  117Screen parameters (TESS)  127Serial parameters (TESS)  133Start and End  (ANSI)  126TESS Settings  126–134Test parameters (TESS)  134Transmit parameters (ANSI)  123approvals7035 (including scanner)  1888255  1908260  190Ar (area number-Wan)  58arrow keyscompleting a data field  64, 136cycling through specialcharacters  86, 152Enh Mode, using  138in macros  153moving the cursor  32Arrows (Scan-See)  149ASCIIFull Ascii  105matching fields  132table  C-1Async In  126attributes, video  122, 137Auto Pan  93auto tab fields  64Auto Wrap  118Auto-Answer  124AutoRep Fn  134AutoRep T/O  134BBacklight settings7035 hand-held  948255 & 8260 LCD vehicle-mounts  95backspace (CTRL H)  125bar codeAIAG  135appending to  104, 107, 109comparing entry string with decodedbar code  102connecting bar code reader  159decodes required  103decoding edge-to-edge  103displaying type of bar code  104I 2 of 5 decodes  103parameters  105–115prefix character  107, 109scanner port  159Security  103Short Code  103stripping characters  107, 109suffix character  107, 109symbologiesCodabar  113Code 11  113Code 128  107Code 39  105–106Code 93  113D 2 of 5  115EAN 13  108EAN 8  110I 2 of 5  114MSI/Plessy  114UPC A  111UPC E  112translating  102bar code readerexternal (specs)  193external scanner, operation of  159integrated scanner, operation of  46internal or integrated (specs)  193bar-code-only fields  64battery charger  163–170fault charge indicator (7942)  165fault charge indicator (7967)  168mounting bracket (7942)  164safety instructions (7967 & 7942)  169–170specifications for 7942  166specifications for 7967  169
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual IIIIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal7942 in-unit charger  163–1677967 gang charger  167–169battery charger (7967)charge complete indicators  165battery pack  160–163a description of  160bar graph (indicating capacity)  42, 49battery specs  162battery specs (specific to picker cradle)  177capacity of  42, 49charge time  165, 166charging  165conditioning  49description of  50full recharge  166gauge (bar graph)  42, 49installing  18Lithium-Ion safety precautions  160maintaining  49removing  17safety precautions (Lithium-Ion)  161time (full charge)  166battery See also battery pack.  160Beam Lockout  135Beep Tone and Beep Time  154beeperadjusting volume  43adjusting volume using Volume parameter  43description of beep conditions  42volume adjustment using the BLUE key  43bell (CTRL G)  125blinking video attribute  122, 137BLUE and ORANGE keys, how to use  30bold video attribute  122, 137Bootp, request for See Employ Bootp  153bootp, request for See Employ Bootp  154Bottom Margin (auto panning)  93Brightness (Scan-See)  148Bs (base identifier)  58Buffer  143bytes received (inbyte)  55bytes sent (outbyte)  55Ccablesextension power cables, installing  25installing for 8255 and 8260  24capacity of battery  42, 49Card Information Structure - CIS  D-3, D-5, D-11, D-15, D-16Cellular (NB Radio Address)  D-6cellular mode  D-15ch (operating channel)  56Chan (channel number-WAN)  58changing softkey labels  118, 129Channel #  D-7, D-12Channel (802.11 DS radio)  D-3Channel Auto (Next ch-auto)  D-13Channel Enable  D-7, D-13channel quality (cq), displaying  55channel quality, displaying  54, 56channels (Narrow Band)Channel #  D-7Channel Enable  D-7, D-13Manual Table  D-8Power-up chan  D-7Switch Speed  D-8switching using Manual Table  D-8channels (902 spread spectrum)Channel #  D-12Channel Auto (Next ch-auto)  D-13Channel Enable  D-13Next ch-auto (Channel Auto)  D-13Power-up chan  D-12Char Set (ANSI)  119Char Set (TESS)  130Character parameters (TESS)  129character setsChinese Options  121choosing in ANSI  119choosing in TESS  130Code Page  95DEC Options  121, 131IBM Options  120, 131ISO Options  120, 130Korean Options  122characters
IndexIV Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalappending to bar codes  107, 109ASCII table  C-1Char Set, choosing (ANSI)  119Char Set, choosing (TESS)  130Chinese options  121Code Page  95Custom Chars (ASCII characters-TESS)  140cycling through  86, 152DEC options, choosing  121, 131IBM options, choosing  120, 131Invis (TESS)  130ISO options, choosing  120, 130Korean options  122NULL (TESS)  130prefix 107, 109stripping  107, 109suffix 107, 109charge time required  166chargercharge ready indicator  165charge time  165failed charge (7942)  165failed charge (7967)  168full recharge  165gang charger (7967)  167–169in-unit charger (7942)  163–167mounting bracket (7942)  164safety instructions (7967 & 7942)  169–170specifications for 7942  166specifications for 7967  169time (full charge)  165charging batteries  165check digit  108, 112, 113, 114, 115Chinese  char sets  121Chinese font sizes  97Chk Digit, 1  113, 114Chk Digit, 2  113CIS Data (Card Information Structure)  D-3, D-5, D-11, D-15, D-16Click Data (scanner double-click)  104Click Time (scanner double-click)  103CLR/DEL Keydescription of  33in Local Echo mode (ANSI)  125TESS sessions, CLR key behaviour in  66Codabar  113Code Page  95Code 11  113Code 128  107Code 39  105–106Code 93  113colours, remapping  98Column Offset  146columnsColumn Offset  146number of in ANSI screen  118number of in TESS screen  127Columns (ANSI)  118Columns (TESS)  127configuring softkey labels  118, 129Conn Type (connection type)  117connection, host  117, 127console portScan-See settings  144console port settings  142Console Settings  141–150Console 2 Port SettingsBuffer  143Data Bits  142disabling  141enabling  141Input Tmo  143Nomad option  141Parity  142peripheral devices  141Print option  141Retries  143Scanner option  141Scan-See option  141Speed  142Stop Bits  142Test  144ContNxtField  134contrast, adjusting  44, 90Controller MAN  (Mobitex)  D-15country code  108cq (channel quality), displaying  54, 55, 56
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual VIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalCR/LFLF character  124Line Offset  146Line Scrolling  148Newline  124CR/LF, CTRL J  125cradle See also Picker cradle  171–177CTRL commandsCTRL a  75CTRL f  65CTRL G (Bell)  125CTRL H (Backspace)  125CTRL h (host select)  69CTRL i  65CTRL I (Tab)  125CTRL J (Line Feed)  125CTRL K (Vertical Tab)  125CTRL L  153CTRL L (Form Feed)  125CTRL p (reprint)  69CTRL r  65CTRL s (status,displaying continuously)  69CTRL t (status, display with terminal #)  69CTRL u  65CTRL w (status, display in Lock B & H mode)  69CTRL Key  33cursorAnchor Column (Scan-See)  146Arrows (Scan-See)  149Brightness (Scan-See)  148Column Offset (Scan-See)  146Enh Edit mode  138Field Order  136Follow Cursor (Scan-See)  148Line Offset (Scan-See)  146Line Scrolling (Scan-See)  148linefeed mode (ANSI)  125moving between fields  136Newline mode (ANSI)  125Panning (Scan-See)  148Custom Chars (ASCII characters-TESS)  140DD 2 of 5  115dataentering  64, 136Ign Bcode_fld 137with a bar code reader  159transmitting from the terminal  64, 123, 136Data Bits  142Data Rate  D-2dead zone  195DEC  char sets  121, 131decoding bar codescomparing entry string  102decode zone  197decodes required  103Security  103Short Code  103decrementing parameters  84Default Gateway  154Default Gateway (Gateway IP address)  154DEFAULT key (F4)  83DEFLT key (F4)  87DEL Key (ANSI parameter)  125DEL/CLR Keydescription of  33in Local Echo mode (ANSI)  125TESS sessions, DEL key behaviour in  67Dev Attri  123device attribute requests  73digitcheck digit  108, 112, 113, 114, 115number system  111, 112disabling/enabling Y/N parameters  85displayAnchor View  139Display ShiftDisplay Shift  140Field Scroll  128font sizes, Chinese and Korean  97font sizes, North American and European  96moving  139
IndexVI Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalOrigin Scroll  128positioning  128Use Increment  139video attributes  122, 137X-Increment  139X-origin  139Y-Increment  139Y-origin  139display contrast, adjusting  44Display menu  81Display Menu, accessing and using  28DOS, launching and exiting  29Dot Time  104double-clickappending characters to a decodedbar code  104scanner trigger  103dropped packets (drppkt)  55drppkt (dropped packets)  55Duration (key click)  91EEAN 13  108EAN 8  110EAN/UCC 128  108Echo ModeHost echo  125Local echo  125Smart echo  124edit modes, TESS  65Employ Bootp  154enabling/disabling Y/N parameters  85End (ANSI)  126Enh Edit Mode (TESS)  138ENTER keycompleting a data field  64CR/LF character  124Enter on Arrows  136Local Echo mode (ANSI)  125Newline mode (ANSI)  125Enter On Arr  136Enter To F0  136entry fields  64Function keys  136hidden match  132Ign Bcode_fld 137video attributes  122, 137visible match  132entry mode  136Err Accept  106Err Func key  132error reply message in TESS  132Error Tone and Error Time  155ESC Key  34ESSID  D-1, D-4European font sizes  96Exp to UPC A  112Ext (external scanner types)  101Ffailed battery charge (7942)  165failed battery charge (7967)  168Fast Switch, using Switch Speed parameter  D-8fault condition (battery charging with 7942)  165fault condition (battery charging with 7967)  168Fcursor mode  65Features parameters (for TESS Settings)  138Field mode  65Field Order  136fieldsauto-tab fields  64bar-code-only fields  64completing a data field  64, 136Enh Edit mode  138entry fields  64Field Order  136Field Scroll  128Field Size  106fixed fields  64hidden match  132Ign Bcode_fld 137“insert” mode  136match fields  64“replace” mode  136serial I/O fields  64size  106
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual VIIIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal“transmit on” 64video attributes  122, 137visible match  132Fields parameters (for TESS Settings)  136fixed fields  64Flow Control  143Follow Cursor  148Font Size, changing  96Font Size, Chinese and Korean  97fontsChinese  97European  96Korean  97North American  96form feed (CTRL L)  125Full Ascii  105Function keys  36accessing F1 to F12  36accessing F13 to F24  36accessing F25 to F36  37ANSI equivalents  74completing a data field  64entering data  136error reply  132Open Fky Only  136softkey labels, changing  118, 129softkeys  36Ggang charger (7967)  167–169Gateway See Default Gateway  154Gateway, Default  154gauge, battery  42, 49Global Macros  150–153adding special characters  152displaying special characters (ASCII)  152programming special keys  153grey scale, adusting  98HH Match Chr  132handstrap, installing on 7035  19helpdesk  A-1hidden fields match  132Hop Pattern  D-4Hop Set  D-4Host (ANSI Connection Type)  117Host (TESS Connection Type)  127Host ConnectionANSI  117TESS  127Host Echo  125host select (CTRL h)  69II 2 of 5  114I/O fields  64IBM  char sets  120, 131Idle Poll Limit  D-11Ign Bcode_fld 137In #n  102In (Serial In)  133inbyte (received bytes)  55Inc Country  108Inc Num Sys  111, 112Include Chk  106, 108, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114Include Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology)  115Include Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology)  114incrementing parameters  84indicators  40LED functions  39onscreen messages  40scanner message  46inerrs (received packets w errors)  55Infra and Adhoc networks  D-3, D-5Infrared (IrDA) port, using  48initialized messages, transmitted (xi)  56inpkts (received packets)  55inputbar code reader  159bar-code-only fields  64Input tmo  143“insert” mode  136Open Fky Only  136“replace” mode  136serial I/O fields  64
IndexVIII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalInput Tmo  143Insert mode  65“insert” mode  136installationantenna, 7035  17antenna, 8255 and 8260  24battery pack  17–18handstrap  19pistol grip  198255 and 8260 vehicle-mounts  20Int (internal scanner types)  101integrated scanner option  46Intensity (7035 backlighting)  94in-unit charger (7942)  163–167Invis characters (TESS)  130IP addressesbootp, requesting  153, 154Default Gateway (Gateway IP address)  154Employ Bootp (bootp request)  154Local IP (terminal IP address)  153Net Mask (subnet mask)  153IrDA (Infrared) port, using  48ISO  char sets  120, 130ITF Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology)  114KKbd Locked  138Key Click, adjusting Tone and Duration  91key lock functionlocking and unlocking  34One Shot Mode  34keyboardcompatibility with VT220 ANSIterminal keyboard  74lock  138lock messages  69locking and unlocking keys  34One Shot Mode  34Keyboard (vehicle-mounts)  95Keyboard modeHost Echo  125Local Echo  125Newline  124Smart Echo  124Keyboard parameters (ANSI)  124keyserror reply  132keys, locking and unlocking  34Korean  char sets  122Korean font sizes  97Llabels, softkey  118, 129laser beam  46launchingDOS  81Parameters menu  81Tekterm  81LCD Scan-Seeparameter settings, default  145LEDlink indicator  59picker cradle indicators  176receive  39, 59transmit  39, 597035 indicators  597967 Gang Charger  167LED Scan-Seeparameter settings (default)  145Left Margin (auto panning)  93LF/CRLF character  124Line Offset  146Line Scrolling  148Newline  124LF/CR, CTRL J  125Line Offset  146Line Scrolling  148Lithium-Ion batteriescharging  165description of  160installing  18maintaining  49removing  17safety precautions  50, 160Local Echo  125Local Echo See Echo Mode  124Local IP  153“LOCK–B” message  69, 128
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual IXIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminallocked keyboard  138“LOCK–H” message  69, 128locking and unlocking keys  34, 100Lucent WaveLAN 802.11PC card (TRX7430)parameters (radio)  D-1specs  184Lucent WaveLAN 802.11PC card (TRX7431)specs  184MMacro keys See also Global Macros  39maintenance See terminal maintenance  48Manual Table  D-8match fields  64memory, resetting  87messageserror reply in TESS  132“LOCK–B” 69, 128“LOCK–H” 69, 128onscreen indicators  40“RESET: Press Enter” 63Scan Indication  104Scan Result  104scanner warning message  47, 104messages received (rm)  56Mixed AIAG  135Mobitex WAN radio (TRX7460)  D-15Address (Subscription) Number (MAN)  58Ar (Area number)  58Bs (base identifier)  58Chan (channel number)  58MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number)  58Mobitex Net  57parameters  D-15–D-16Rssi (received signal strength)  58Rx (Receive radio stats)  59specs  186State  58statistics  57Subscription Number (MAN)  58Tx (transmit radio stats)  59Mod 10 Chk  106Mod 10 Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology)  115Mod 10 Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology)  114Mod 43 Chk  106Model 7000parameter settings, default  145Model 7000Mparameter settings, default  145mounting cradlefor 8255 terminal  20–22for 8260 terminal  23–24moving the display  128, 139MSI/Plessy  114multipleANSI sessions  115applications  115TESS sessions  63, 115Nnarrow band (TRX7370) radio parameters  D-6–D-11narrow band radio (TRX7370)  183, D-6Net Mask  153Network (Adhoc or Infra)  D-3, D-5Network addresses  153bootp, requesting  153, 154Default Gateway (Gateway IP address)  154Employ Bootp  153Employ Bootp (bootp request)  154Local IP (terminal IP address)  153Net Mask (subnet mask)  153Newline  124Newline  124Next ch-auto (Channel Auto)  D-13NEXT key (F1)  83Nomadconsole port settings  141, 144North American font sizes  96NULL characters (TESS)  130numberof columns (ANSI)  118of columns (TESS)  127
IndexXTeklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalof pages (ANSI)  117of rows (ANSI)  118of rows (TESS)  128Terminal # (ANSI)  73, 116Terminal # (TESS)  63number system digit  111, 112numeric fields (Rjct if Alpha)  135numeric parameters  84numeric parameters, minimum/maximum limits to  84Ooffices list  A-3off-line terminalPower Off Time  D-11PwrOFF time  D-15On Time (7035 backlight)  94On/Off button  26onscreen indicators  40–41Open Fky Only  136Options parameters (for scanning)  102ORANGE and BLUE keys, how to use  30order of fields in TESS screen  136Origin Scroll  128Out #n  103Out (Serial Out)  133outbyte (sent bytes)  55outerrs (packet send errors)  55outpkts (sent packets)  55PPack  177packet errors, send (outerrs)  55packet send errors (outerrs)  55packets dropped (drppkt)  55packets received (inpkts)  55packets sent (outpkts)  55packets w errors, received (inerrs)  55pagesColumns (ANSI)  118Columns (TESS)  127Pages (ANSI)  117positioning  128reprinting  69Rows (ANSI)  118Rows (TESS)  128size/shape  118Pages (ANSI)  117Pages Saved (TESS)  128Palette Remap  98Panning (Scan-See)  148panning, auto and manual parameters  92–93parametersAlpha parameters  85main menu, displaying  88numeric  84saving changes to  87string entry  85, 86, 152Y/N (boolean)  85Parameters menu, launching and exiting  28Parity  142parity (Scan-See)  144“PASSTHRU” command  141PC card, specifications for  183, 184peripheral (serial) port  9peripheral port I/O connector  159peripherals, defining serial connections  141picker cradle  171cable, connecting  173disassembling before mounting  172installation  171installing cable  173LED indicators  176maintenance  174mounting  173port replicator, attaching  174power source, connecting  174powered 10-55 VDC (model #7937C)  171powered 11-16 VDC (model # 7937B)  171specifications  177unpowered (model # 7937A)  171pistol grip, installing on 7035  19pitch, scanning  195pmenu, displaying  88
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XIIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalPoll Timeout  D-10poll timeouts (pt)  56Poll Timing parameters  D-9–D-10polls received (rp)  56Port (ANSI Connection Type)  117Port (TESS Connection Type)  127port replicator (picker cradle)  174portsANSI Connection Type  117Buffer  143console settings  141Console 2 settings  141Data Bits  142Flow Control  143Input tmo  143Parity  142Retries  143Scan-See settings  144serial settings  141Serial 1 settings  141settings  141Speed  142Stop Bits  142TESS Connection Type  127Test  144XON & XOFF (Scan-See)  1507035 terminal  9positionof screen  128powerIdle Poll Limit  D-11Power Down  99Power Off  100Power Off Time  D-11power save states  197Pwr Saving  D-5PwrOFF time  D-15PwrOFF Xmit  D-15PwrON time  D-14Rx Multicasts  D-2Sleep Duration  D-3Watchdog Timer  99Power Down  (7035)  99Power Off  (7035)  100Power Off Time  D-11power saving parametersnarrow band  D-11Power Down (7035)  99Power Off (7035)  100spread spectrum 902 MHz  D-12Watchdog Timer  99802.11 direct sequence  D-2802.11 frequency hopping  D-5Power-up chan  D-7, D-12Prefix (Serial In)  133Prefix (Serial Out)  133Prefix Char  107, 109PREV key (F2)  84PREVIOUS key (F2)  83printingpages  69pass-through  141Proxim RangeLAN 802 FHSS 2.4GHzPC cardparameters (radio)  D-4specs  183pt (poll timeouts)  56punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key)  31Pwr Saving  D-5Pwr Saving (802.11 DS)  D-2PwrOFF time  D-15PwrOFF Xmit  D-15PwrON time  D-14Rra (received radio link aborts)  56radioAddress (Subscription) Number (MAN)  58AP Density  D-2Ar (Area number)  58Bs (base identifier)  58cellular mode  D-15Chan (channel number)  58Channel (802.11 DS radio)  D-3CIS Data (Card Information Structure)  D-3, D-5, D-11, D-15, D-16
IndexXII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalController MAN  (Mobitex)  D-15Data Rate  D-2ESSID  D-1, D-4Hop Pattern  D-4Hop Set  D-4MAN (Mobitex Address Number)  58MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number)  58Mobitex Net  57Mobitex statistics screen  57Network (Adhoc or Infra)  D-3, D-5parameters  D-1–D-16power saving parameters  D-14–D-15Pwr Saving  D-5Pwr Saving (802.11 DS)  D-2Radio Mode  (Mobitex)  D-16Reservation  D-2resetting statistics  60Roaming  D-5Rssi (received signal strength)  58Rx (Receive radio stats)  59spread spectrum (902)  D-12State  58Station  D-2statistics screen (Mobitex)  57statistics screen (narrow band)  56statistics screen (802.11 SS)  56statistics screen (802.11)  55statistics screen, resetting  60statistics screen, viewing  54statistics, resetting  60TRX7370 narrow band  183TRX7370 statistics screen  56TRX7410 TekLan DS SS 902 MHz radio  183, D-12TRX7410A TekLan DS SS 902 MHz radio  183, D-12TRX7440 Proxim RangeLAN 802 FHSS 2.4GHz PC card  183TRX7460 Mobitex WAN radio  D-15Tx (transmit radio stats)  59WLAN 902 spread spectrum  D-12802.11 SS statistics screen  56802.11 statistics screen  55Radio Address (narrow band)  D-6Radio Address (902 spread spectrum)  D-12radio link aborts received (ra)  56Radio Mode (WAN)  D-16radio statistics screen  54Address Number (MAN)  58Ar (Area number)  58Bs (base identifier)  58Chan (channel number)  58MAN (Mobitex Address Number)  58Mobitex  57Mobitex Net  57Rssi (received signal strength)  58Rx (Receive radio stats)  59State  58TRX7370  56Tx (transmit radio stats)  59802.11  55802.11 SS  56radio statistics screen, resetting  60RangeLAN 802 PC card (TRX7440 Proxim)parameters  D-4specs  183received bytes (inbyte)  55received messages (rm)  56received packets (inpkts)  55received packets w errors (inerrs)  55received polls (rp)  56received radio link aborts (ra)  56Reinit tmo (902 wireless LAN)  D-14Replace mode  65“replace” mode  136replicator, port (picker cradle)  174reprinting a page  69Reservation  D-2“RESET: Press Enter” message  63resettingdefault parameter values  87terminal memory  87retransmissions (xr)  56Retries  143reverse video attribute  122, 137Right Margin (auto panning)  93Rjct if Alpha  135
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XIIIIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalrm (received messages)  56Roaming  D-5rowsnumber of in ANSI screen  118number of in TESS screen  128Rows (ANSI)  118Rows (TESS)  128rp (received polls)  56Rssi (received signal strength)  58RS-232 port  6Rx (Receive radio stats-Wan)  59Rx Multicasts (Pwr Saving)  D-2Ssafety instructionsbattery charger (7967 & 7942)  169–170general  xiscanner  46safety warning, scanner  46SAVE key (F3)  83Save key (F3)  36sc (scan state)  56SCAN Key  34scan state (sc)  56Scan Tone and Scan Time  155scannerAppend Enter  135Append F0  135appending data  104bar code, appending data to  104Click Data (appending data)  104Click Time (double-click)  103ContNxtField  134Dot Time  104double-click  103laser beam  46operating  46parameters (for TESS Settings)  134safety warnings  46Scan-See  144specifications  194target dot duration  104TESS Scanner parameters  134Type (of scanner)  101warning message  47, 104scanningAIAG  135Append Enter  135Append F0  135appending characters  104, 107, 109check digit  108, 112, 113, 114, 115Click Data (appending data)  104Click Time  103console port labelling  141ContNxtField  134country code  108decode zone  197Dot Time  104double-click  103Ext (external)scannerExt (external scanner types)  101identifying the type of scanner used  101In (translate)  102Int (internal)scannerInt (internal scanner types)  101locked terminal  135Nomad  141, 144number system digit  111, 112operating the scanner  46Out (translate)  103pitch  195prefix character  107, 109removing characters  107, 109Rjct if Alpha  135safety instructions  46Scan Indication  104Scan Result  104Scan-See  141, 144–149Scan-See, configuring port for  144Security  103serial port labelling  141Short Code  103skew  195specular dead zone  195suffix character  107, 109symbologies  105target dot duration  104
IndexXIV Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminaltechniques  46, 48TESS Scanner parameters  134Translate bar code  102trouble-shooting tips  47Type (of scanner)  101Verify  103warning message  46Scan-Seeconfiguring port for  144console port settings  141, 144display, mapping to viewport  145parameters  144–149port, configuring  144serial number  144, 149version  144viewport, mapping display to  145Screen (8255 & 8260 LCD backlighting)  95Screen parametersANSI  117TESS  127screensAnchor View  139Columns (ANSI)  118Columns (TESS)  127Display Shift  140Field Scroll  128moving between fields  136Origin Scroll  128page size/shape  118, 127positioning  128Rows (ANSI)  118Rows (TESS)  128Use Increment  139X- and Y-origin  139X-Increment  139Y-Increment  139scrollingField Scroll  128Origin Scroll  128Scan-See  148Security  103select host (CTRL h)  69sent bytes (outbytes)  55sent packets (outpkts)  55serial (peripheral) port  9serial I/O fields  64serial number (Scan-See)  144, 149Serial parameters (for TESS Settings)  133serial port  6In (Serial In)  133Out (Serial Out)  133pass-through  141Prefix (Serial In)  133Prefix (Serial Out)  133Suffix (Serial In)  133Suffix (Serial Out)  134serial port settings  142Serial Settings  141–150Serial 1 Port SettingsBuffer  143Data Bits  142disabling  141enabling  141Flow Control  143Input Tmo  143Output option  141Parity  142peripheral devices  141Print option  141Retries  143Scanner option  141Speed  142Stop Bits  142Test  144service information  A-1sessionswindows, cycling through  54setting the terminal number  63SHIFT Key  31Short Code (bar code option)  103sizeof fields  106Size/Chars (bar code scanning)  106skew, scanning  195Sled See picker cradle.  171Sleep Duration (Pwr Saving)  D-3Smart Echo  124softkeys (Function keys)  83F1 - Next key  36
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XVIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalF2 - Previous key  36F3 - Save key  36F4 - Default key  36softkey labels, changing  118, 129Sound parameters (error and scan beeps)  154SPACE Key  34special keys, programming into macros  153specificationsbattery  187, 199battery pack (Li-Ion)  162battery pack (specific to picker cradle)  177COM 1  191COM 2  191CPU  187cradle, picker  177for 7035 terminal  186memory expansion  187, 189, 192picker cradle  177radio specs  183–186scanner  194specular dead zone  195Speed  142spread spectrum (902) radio parameters  D-12–D-15spread spectrum radio (902)  D-12Standard  107Start and End (ANSI)  126start up menu  81State (Wan)  58Station  D-2statistics (radio)  54statistics (radio), resetting  60statistics screenAddress Number (MAN)  58Ar (Area number)  58Bs (base identifier)  58Chan (channel number)  58MAN (Mobitex Address Number)  58Mobitex Net  57Mobitex radio  57Mobitex WAN radio (TRX7460)  57narrow band radio (TRX7370)  56Rssi (received signal strength)  58Rx (Receive radio stats)  59spread spectrum radio (TRX7370)  56State  58TRX7370 narrow band radio  56TRX7370 radio  56TRX7370 spread spectrum radio  56TRX7460 Mobitex WAN radio  57Tx (transmit radio stats)  59802.11 radio  55802.11 SS radio  56status, displaying continuously  69status, displaying in Lock B & Lock H mode  69status, displaying terminal #  69Stop Bits  142string entry parameters  85, 86, 152adding special characters to  86cycling through special characters  86key function description  85Strip Leading  107, 109Strip Trailing  107, 109sub-menus, accessing  84subnet mask (Net Mask) 153Suffix (Serial In)  133Suffix (Serial Out)  134Suffix Char  107, 109support services  A-1Switch Speed  D-8symbologies, bar code  105displaying type of bar code  104Sync Delay  D-9System menu  90Ttab (CTRL I)  125TAB Key  34tab, vertical (CTRL K)  125TCP Direct connection  117, 127TekLan (TRX7410)  183, D-12TekLan (TRX7410A)  183, D-12TekLan 902 MHz DS SS (TRX7410)  183, D-12
IndexXVI Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalTekLan 902 MHz DS SS (TRX7410A)  183, D-12Tektermexiting  60launching  53radio statistics screen, displaying  54radio statistics, resetting  60statistics (radio)  54statistics (radio), resetting  60working with application session windows  54Tekterm, bypassing to Display Menu  28Tekterm, launching and exiting  29Telnet connection  117, 127terminaloff-line terminal  D-15Terminal # (ANSI)  116Terminal # (ANSI)  116Terminal # (TESS)  126terminal maintenancebattery (7035)  49cleaning  487035 (special instructions)  49TESSAll Fld Video  137Append Enter  135Append F0  135Applications menu  115AutoRep Fn  134AutoRep T/O  134Blink (video attrib.)  137Bold (video attrib.)  137CLR key behaviour  66Columns  127configuration  63ContNxtField  134CTRL commands  65cursor movement (in edit modes)  65Custom Chars (ASCII characters)  140DEL key behaviour  67edit modes  65Enh Edit Mode  138Enter On Arr  136Enter To F0  136Entry ModeEntry Mode  136error reply message  132Fcursor mode  65Features parameters  138Field mode  65Field Order  136Field parameters  136Host (Connection Type)  127Ign Bcode_fld 137In (Serial In)  133Insert mode  65Invis characters  130Kbd Locked  138keyboard lock  138matching fields via data stream  132modes (edit)  65multiple sessions  115NULL characters  130number of columns in screen  127number of rows in screen  128Out (Serial Out)  133Pages Saved  128pass-through  141Port  127Prefix (Serial In)  133Prefix (Serial Out)  133query command  128Replace mode  65Reverse (video attrib.)  137Rows  128running multiple sessions  63selecting a session  63settings  126–134Suffix (Serial In)  133Suffix (Serial Out)  134Terminal #  126video attributes  137TESS Settingscharacter attributes  129character sets, choosing  130Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct  127Features parameters  138Fields parameters  136Scanner parameters  134
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XVIIIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalscreen settings  127serial parameters  133test parameters  134Test  144Test parameters (for TESS Settings)  134Threshold (7035 backlight)  94timeout (902 Wlan)  D-14timeouts, poll (pt)  56Timing parameters  D-9–D-10Tone (key click)  91Translate, bar code  102transmit failures (xe)  56Transmit parameters (ANSI)  123transmitted messages (xm)  56transmitting data  123, 136“transmit on” entry field  64trigger, double-click  103trouble-shooting tips (scanning)  47TRX7370 narrow band radioparameters  D-6specs  183TRX7410/10A TekLan 902 DS SS radioparameters  D-12specs  183TRX7430 Lucent 802.11 DS SS radioparameters  D-1specs  184TRX7431 Lucent 802.11 DS SS radiospecs  184TRX7440 Proxim RangeLAN 802.11FH SS radioparameters  D-4specs  183TRX7460 Mobitex radiospecs  186Tx (transmit radio stats-Wan)  59Type (of scanner)  101typing in upper case  132UUCC 128  108underlinevideo attribute  122unlocking keys  34, 100UPC A  111UPC E  112Upper Case  132Use IncrementX-Increment  139Y-Increment  139Use increment  139VV Match Chr  132Verify  103Version (Scan-See)  144, 149vertical tab (CTRL K)  125VGA palette, remapping  98video attributes  122, 137All Fld Video  137Blink  122, 137Bold  122, 137Reverse  122, 137Underline  122viewport (Scan-See display), mapping  145visible fields match  132Volume  43volume, adjusting  90VT220 Function keys – equivalent Teklogix keyboard Function keys  74WWANAddress (Subscription) Number (MAN)  58Ar (Area number)  58Bs (base identifier)  58Chan (channel number)  58MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number)  58Mobitex Net  57Mobitex radio parameters  D-15Mobitex radio statistics screen  57Rssi (received signal strength)  58Rx (Receive radio stats)  59State  58Tx (transmit radio stats)  59
IndexXVIII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User ManualBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalWAN radio (Mobitex) parameters  D-15–D-16warnings  104Watchdog Timer  99WaveLAN 802 PC card (Lucent TRX7430)parameters  D-1specs  184WaveLAN 802 PC card (Lucent TRX7431)specs  184website address  A-4Wide Area NetworkAr (Area number)  58Bs (base identifier)  58Chan (channel number)  58MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number)  58Mobitex Net  57radio parameters  D-15radio statistics screen  57Rssi (received signal strength)  58Rx (Receive radio stats)  59State  58Subscription (Address) Number (MAN)  58Tx (transmit radio stats)  59Window Delay  D-10wireless LAN (Wlan)timeout  D-14WLAN Timing (Reinit Tmo or 902)  D-14WLAN 902 spread spectrum radio  D-12Working  54worldwide offices  A-3Wraparound  148wrapping characters, automatically  118XX Increment (manual panning)  93x origin  139xe (transmit failures)  56xi (transmitted initialize messages)  56X-Increment  139xm (transmitted messages)  56Xmit Count  123Xmit Wait  123XON/XOFF (Scan-See)  150X-origin  139xr (retransmissions)  56YY Increment (manual panning)  93y origin  139Y/N parameters, enabling and disabling  85Y-Increment  139Y-origin  1391 Chk Digit  113, 1142 Chk Digit  1137035 picker cradle See also Picker Cradle  171–1777035 terminalantenna, attaching  17approvals  188battery, installing  17display  188font sizes (LCD), Chinese and Korean  98font sizes, North American and European  97hand-strap, attaching  19pistol grip, attaching  19ports  9specifications  1867937A, unpowered picker cradle  1717937B, powered picker cradle (11-16 VDC)  1717937C, powered picker cradle (10-55 VDC)  1717942 in-unit charger  163–1677967 battery charger  167–1698255antenna, attaching  24approvals  190cables, installing  24display  189, 190extension power cables, installing  25font sizes (LCD), Chinese and Korean  97
Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XIXIndexBoldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminalfont sizes (LCD), North American and European  96font sizes (VFD), Chinese and Korean  97font sizes (VFD), North American and European  96mounting cradle, attaching terminal to  20–228260antenna, attaching  24approvals  190cables, installing  24extension power cables, installing  25font size (for all 8260 terminals)  97mounting cradle, attaching terminal to  23902 spread spectrum radio parameters  D-12–D-15

Navigation menu